JP7314071B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In some conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined condition (the entry of a game ball into a starting area) is established, a specific display (suspended display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means, and for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a pre-reading notice that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display can be executed.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the amusement of the game cannot be improved only by executing the specific light emission effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The object of the present invention is to provide a game machine which enables a player to easily recognize a specific display, which is the object of a specific light emitting performance, and which can improve the interest in a game.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member which is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a sound output means capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The translucent member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The effect executing means executes the specific light emission effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect, and sets the light emitting means in a non-light emitting state for a predetermined period from when the predetermined condition is established until the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect.
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode,
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the light emission means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, pachinko machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
with
The translucent member (eg, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (eg, LED board 303) and the specific member (eg, base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12),
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) is provided at a position further away from the display means than the specific member (e.g., upper portion of base member 301),
moreover,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a portion in which the pending display or the active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) and a specific light emission effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning), based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start winning);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that lights up F),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect is executed when winning, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed when winning).
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d),
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the first prize winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). As shown in 5-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and blinks with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the second winning flash effect execution period),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term, and blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the second term. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display targeted for the specific light emitting performance, and in the first period of the specific light emitting performance, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means are caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, thereby making the specific light emitting performance more conspicuous, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display targeted for the specific light emitting performance.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering a game ball into a starting area), as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-105941, a specific display (reserved display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means. There was a specific lighting effect) that was executable. However, in such a game machine, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it is conceivable that the player may have difficulty in recognizing the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a portion in which the pending display or the active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) and a specific light emission effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning), based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start winning);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that lights up F),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect is executed when winning, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed when winning).
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d),
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the first prize winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). As shown in 5-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and blinks with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the second winning flash effect execution period),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term, and blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the second term. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and in the first period of the specific light emitting effect, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, thereby making the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous, so that the player can more easily recognize the specific display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as other matters specifying the invention.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of image display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3; It is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production|presentation unit from diagonally front. (A) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10-7(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 10-7(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 10-7(A). (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED board, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11B is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B); (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view along GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view along HH in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20; It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual recognition condition of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit light-emit. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp off. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a front view of the pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. This is a timing chart showing the output of a sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, the lighting of the lamp for the flash at the time of winning, the game effect lamp and the starter lamp, and the display timing of the effect image and the silhouette image when the start winning, which is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. 10 is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turning on the lamp for the flash at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and displaying the effect image and the silhouette image when the start winning, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, occurs in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starter switch 22A, second starter switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are invisible or invisible to the player,
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
with
The predetermined member is characterized by having a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, general-purpose products can be used for the predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player, without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or 2,
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is provided at a position spaced apart from the display means more than the specific member (for example, an upper portion of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Provided above the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side from the electronic components (e.g., protruding portion 3A),
The projecting portion is characterized by being larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the projecting portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to form 4,
The electronic components (eg, LED substrates 603, 803) and the specific members (eg, base members 601, 801) are dark (eg, black) (modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component is more likely to be hidden in the shadow of the projecting portion, making it less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the visibility of the specific member is higher than that of the electronic component, so the electronic component can be relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The translucent member (eg, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (eg, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (eg, base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specified member (eg, base member 301) is provided with a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) at least partially common to the circuit pattern (eg, printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to form 7 or 8,
The specific member (eg, base member 301) has a predetermined region (eg, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the translucent member (eg, cover member 302),
A predetermined decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) identical or similar in form to the decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined region (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to recognize that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401) (see FIGS. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the border between the electronic parts and the specific member becomes difficult to see due to the decorative part, so that the electronic parts become inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number thereof is greater than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorations, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The translucent member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding region (e.g., convex portion 410) corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., region other than convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
Translucency of the boundary corresponding area is lower than translucency of the non-boundary corresponding area.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is less visible to the player through the boundary corresponding area, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 11 or 12,
A logotype (eg, the letter “V”) is displayed on the decorative portion (eg, the decorative portion 420) (see FIGS. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player is less likely to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (eg, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (eg, second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIGS. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous by light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The light-emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so as to allow the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 and enters the region corresponding to the convex portion 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) and the specific member (eg, base member 801), a rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided (see FIGS. 10-20).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the performance means is higher than the visibility of the electronic parts, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The effect means (eg, third effect unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
A rendering section (eg, light-emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (see FIGS. 10-20).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 18,
A rendering section (e.g., light emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) has a color with higher visibility than the color of the electronic component (eg, LED board 803).
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light-emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A and 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
It further comprises a specific translucent member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) for transmitting light that has entered the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (e.g., T direction) is lower than the transmittance (e.g., Y%) for transmitting light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than that of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The plate thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the translucency of the translucent member is low, the electronic components are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is a color similar to that of the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area). Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in a closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is in a closed state in which game balls do not enter (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by opening the start winning opening door when the solenoid 81 is on (also referred to as opening the second starting winning opening). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game balls can easily enter the big winning opening.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, '7', the actual pattern differs depending on the type of big win to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a 'big win', and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, '2') different from the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc., to be described later) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state in the case of some big winning types (the number of opening times of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big winning opening is the same, etc.). In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "general game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to the display or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect using any effect device including part or all of these may be performed.

As a performance executed in accordance with the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started in response to the start of the first special game or the second special game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the jackpot types (big hit type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it is a "minor win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid driving signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving a performance control command and executing a performance (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, power failure recovery reporting, etc.) based on the received performance control command.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing effects together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, including determination of effects to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). The CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing execution and suspension management of a special symbol game, control of a big hit game state and a small hit game state, control of a game state, etc. (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of the normal game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41) and control of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the effect control command to be transmitted in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of times of execution of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened has reached the set upper limit number of times of execution, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period for executing an ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the operation of displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the command (electrical signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When a performance control command designating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big winning game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when a command designating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and a waiting time for receiving the command elapses, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit medium production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although illustration is omitted, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the rear surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state housed in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Although not shown, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting switch functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the game arcade (setting value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 when the frame for the game machine is opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display portions of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first to fourth display portions of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value although the big win probability is constant. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 may be an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of effects using some or all of a plurality of effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the movable members for effect such as the movable body 32 are integrated in one chip by executing data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main board 11. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 may be provided outside the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of performance images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, should be prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, any character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image may be stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or counts down based on the setting of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal as a time elapsed signal when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 91AK 124 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 91AK 131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns. The production control pattern includes, for example, production control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the production control process timer judgment value, and process data including end codes. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The effect control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, a variable data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads out various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125, and the CPU91AK131 receives input of various signals from the outside. It may include reception processing, transmission processing in which the CPU 91AK131 outputs various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 may perform image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily store the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image designated by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer is used to temporarily store palette data defining the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and to temporarily store display data of effect images created by the drawing processing. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 may output a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (grayscale control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The frame buffer may include, for example, a real display area storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and a virtual display area storing display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as that of the display screen of the image display device 5 may be generated in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area may be supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148 to be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching the image display area and the image drawing area each time the V blank occurs, the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period) performs drawing processing for creating display data of each effect image, and in the next V blank cycle (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the display data created by the drawing process is stored in the storage area to which the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the performance control pattern, etc., may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as management data.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining a procedure for displaying effect images, etc. may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. The moving image data may be a multiplexed encoded stream in which image compression information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of a plurality of frames serving as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the moving image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of a plurality of vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by designating straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, and indicates arbitrarily set word units such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these in a recognizable manner. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, may indicate captions, or may indicate other information transmission characters or decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronism with the image in the performance by moving image display, so long as it enables the reproduction and output of any sound with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win A (losing)'', and cannot be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win B (big winning)'' or ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)''. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win B (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)'', and cannot be determined when the ready-to-win performance contents are ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' or ``SP ready-to-win A (losing)''. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the contents of ready-to-win performance are ``SP reach A (big hit)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP reach A (losing)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. When the contents of ready-to-win performance are ``SP reach B (big hit)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP reach B (losing)'', performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in correspondence with reach effect of SP reach A. FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time after the display of the moving image in the ready-to-win performance is started, or may be specified using the elapsed time after the variable display is started. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, it is desirable to specify the start time and end time of the text display period using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode, the timing of starting the display of the moving image may differ even with the common ready-to-win performance due to the variable display performance before the ready-to-reach mode. Even in such a case, if the start time and the end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing of displaying the specific image in the moving image and the timing of displaying the specific text image can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information may be information specifying the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Among them, FIG. 8-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00 when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach A is executed, and the display of the moving image is started to be displayed at timing T10 when the ready-to-reach performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A1). A text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and a text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A2). Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 are set so that the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 includes the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 and the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. Thus, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 as a third text display period included in the first text display period. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added to the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image can be changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, it is possible to change the constituent elements in the display of the text image by changing the text image to be displayed in at least part of a plurality of text display periods. In addition, when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image used as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be changed for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changeable, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changeable.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15 as shown in FIG. 8-5(B). A text image designated by text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed during a text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, and a text image designated by text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed during a text display period from timing T13 to timing T14. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 as the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by. By such setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02 and the period from the timing T03 to the timing T04 in the first text display period. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that it is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 so that the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 and displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the display style or display layout displayed by the information 91AKB13.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this manner, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 can be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in the second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image can be displayed by changing the display mode such that the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode and the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content of the common first component in the corresponding text display period, the display mode of the second component related to the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the content of the ready-to-win effect even when the same text image is designated by the text image designation information. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", for example, whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. Thus, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that various text images can be displayed while preventing an increase in data capacity and an increase in processing load. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changeable accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image tends to be easily visually recognized by the player, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image tends to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the display size of the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, may be changed so that the font size becomes larger than when the display color of the text image is white. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white should be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIGS. 8-7 show an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the ready-to-reach presentation of SP reach A, moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01 is performed when the display result of variable display is ``big hit'', and moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is performed when the display result of variable display is ``losing''. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a performance display as a battle performance in which a common ally character and an enemy character fight each other is performed, and, for example, the contents of the performance display may be common until the timing when the result of the battle is notified. Further, when the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', the decision ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is ``losing'', the decision ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during a moving image display period as the contents of common performance display, the degree of expectation for big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP Reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is, for example, a gothic typeface with origin coordinates (300, 30), font family AA_gothic, bold line width corresponding to bold, and text image display color from #FF0040 to #FF0040 to #40. Elements in the display of the text image are controlled such that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is, for example, a Mincho typeface with origin coordinates of (250,600) and a font family of BB_mincho, a normal line width corresponding to normal, a text image display color of #FFFFFF, and a background display color of #FFFFFF. #220C0C, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character layout is left aligned, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7(B1) includes effect contents different from those of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, a gothic typeface with origin coordinates of (250,600), a font family of CC_gothic, a normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, a text image display color of #000000, and a background display color of #FF. The components in the text image are controlled so that FFFF, the normal typeface corresponding to the character style normal, the character placement in the center, and the character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, character style, and character arrangement are changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information.

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and the text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, for example, a typeface classified as a Mincho typeface with origin coordinates of (250,600) and a font family of DD_mincho, a font size of 72px, a bold line width corresponding to bold, a gold color corresponding to "gold", and a background display. The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the color is #000000, the character style is normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, the font size, the thickness of the characters, the display color of the text image, the background display color, the character style, the character arrangement and the character decoration are changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed may be set individually. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image designated by the text image designation information, if one data among data corresponding to a plurality of fields included in the text display setting information is changed and displayed, other data previously associated with the one data may also be changed and displayed. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color can be set in 256 steps so that the luminance (gradation) of each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is at any level from "0" to "255". In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field may have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a common data format with the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a unique data format different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, it may be possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using specific information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, it is possible to display a glossy text image and add an effect image for displaying gold around the text image. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image showing the words "hot" is specified by the text image specification information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 sets the display style for gold display, so that the specific text image showing the words "hot" is displayed with glossiness, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to enhance the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the Pachinko game machine 1, when the performance by the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the performance by the text image display using the text image data is added so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the performance and the information different from the contents of the performance can be easily provided. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, there is a risk that the text image display using text image data that has been decompressed and decoded may cause problems such as blurring of outlines and deterioration of display quality. In addition, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also tends to increase. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, by adding the effect by text image display using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. In addition, since an effect by text image display using text image data stored separately from moving image data is added, it is possible to appropriately control display capable of preventing as much as possible an increase in the data capacity of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 can execute image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Thus, in the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display contents of the text image as the first constituent element and the display mode of the text image as the second constituent element can be changed according to the elapsed time or the like. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'', a text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed when the performance by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. When the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-reach A (losing)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. In addition, when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win B (big win)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win B (losing)'', a text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed when performance by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By making it possible to add text images using common data to multiple moving images and display them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specifying information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 may be used to display a text image showing the words "very hot" so that the display style can be changed at a plurality of timings. The text image showing the line "Super hot" may be a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image with display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is likely to result in a "jackpot". Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042, and the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, a typeface whose font family is DD_mincho classified as a Mincho font in the fontFamily field and a font size of 72px are set in the fontSize field.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in gold and the character decoration is set to the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, when the character decoration of the text image is set to effect display for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image by, for example, the display color of the border and shadow of the text image, the boundary display by beveling and embossing, the layer style for adding luster, and a combination of some or all of these. Thus, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding and displaying the effect image around the text image, the player can easily recognize the gold display, and the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image may be displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 may be set so that a part of the text image "character" in the text information showing the line "if this character wins..." has a text image display color, a background display color and a character style different from those of the other parts.

FIGS. 8-9 show display examples when a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "character" is displayed in a white display color, a black background display color and an italic character style, and the other part of the text image is displayed in a black display color, a white background color and a normal character style. The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the display color of the text image in the color field, black corresponding to #000000 as the background display color in the backgroundColor field, and italic corresponding to the italic character style in the fontStyle field, respectively, corresponding to a portion of the text image "character". In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the text image display color is black corresponding to #000000 in the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the character style is normal in the fontStyle field. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when music performance or speech reproduction of lines progresses with moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress may be displayed in a display style different from the other parts, such as specific color display or highlight display. It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the elapsed time in the execution of an arbitrary performance without being limited to the situation in which the performance of music or the voice reproduction of lines accompanying the moving image display progresses. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, either one of the display control that makes it possible to change the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component according to the elapsed time or the display control that makes it possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images may be executed, but not the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image may be changeable. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set regarding the display of text images, such as the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the magnification and reduction ratios when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, and the time interval and amount of change for updating the enlargement and reduction ratios when these enlargement and reduction ratios are changed according to the elapsed time.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display content, changing the display mode of the text image is not limited to changing the display color of the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. For example, for the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, any display mode, such as origin coordinates, font family, font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these, may be changed instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image during the corresponding text display period. A text image having a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from that of the text image having a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01.

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of moving image data, and a text image in a specific mode may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from this moving image data. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image data may include specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table may be composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields, or may be composed of field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 can be read without using the font data, and the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data relating to text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be prepared as data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko game machine 1, such as general-purpose Japanese font data. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display performance are stored in a storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data is facilitated, so that the burden of designing performance for displaying text images can be reduced, and an increase in data capacity can be prevented when a large amount of text images are used in display performance.

As a second constituent element related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "Extremely hot", and may be any text image preset as the specific text image corresponding to the specific first constituent element group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, it may be possible to change the second component such as the display mode at a plurality of timings for the specific text image corresponding to the audio effect or the display effect, such as the reproduction output of music or the reproduction display of a moving image, in which the effect contents change according to the elapsed time. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry pattern, may be used as the specific text image. Alternatively, the specific text image may be a text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a "jackpot" than the text image of the display content suggesting that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (e.g., "15") that is larger than the second round number (e.g., "7"), the upper limit number of variable display that can be performed in the time saving state is the second number (e.g., "50"). The number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times that the game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled, becomes the number of consecutive chances (for example, "10") greater than the number of second consecutive chances (for example, "5").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. When displaying a predetermined specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode without being limited to the display color of the text image. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the text decoration field in the text display setting information may be set so that the text image can be displayed with an effect image added around it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field of the text display setting information, the rainbow display may be enabled by changing the different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. For example, at the coordinates in the character of 1, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed such that the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, followed by green, then light blue, then blue, and then bluish purple to reddish purple. At this time, taking into account that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that a change in blue becomes darker, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted, and the display colors at the coordinates within each character are changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image constituent element, such as when the color field of the text display setting information sets the display color of the text image to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow", it may be possible to display a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the coordinates within the character and the display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the text display process table. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components, or may be changeable to any one of a plurality of components at different ratios, depending on whether or not the player's specific action is detected. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image may be, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or any other operation of tilting the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target, without being limited to those that can detect the player's actions. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target may have any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4, and 15/100 (=15%) if the setting value is 5. A value of 6 may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the setting value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the setting value is 4, and 85/100 (=85%) if the setting value is 5. If the value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the content of ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big hit)'', the ratio of executing the performance by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is varied according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the performance by the text image display corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the ratio of executing the performance by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 increases. Therefore, when the content of the ready-to-win performance is ``SP ready-to-win A (big win)'' and the performance by the text image display corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player increases.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of judgment or determination of the game, or any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or determination of the performance. Arbitrary performances may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, without being limited to setting suggestion performances, performance modes may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied, or execution timings may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. Any performance may be limited as a limit that a specific performance is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied, or may be set as a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered compared to a range where the limit condition is not satisfied and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko machine 1 capable of executing a game, and capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as SP reach A or SP reach B, effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100; a video decoder 91AK143, a video renderer 91AK144, etc., for controlling the display of a video image using the data stored in the first storage region; and a character image control means, for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc., for controlling the display of character images using the data stored in the second storage region. Data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by text display setting information, for example, is included, and the character image control means can change the first constituent element and the second constituent element during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component associated with the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period, as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "hot", for example, and can change the second component related to the specific character image at a plurality of timings, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

For example, when a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple, for example, within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in the character or the display time range. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko machine 1 capable of executing a game, and capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as SP reach A or SP reach B, effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100; a video decoder 91AK143, a video renderer 91AK144, etc., for controlling the display of a video image using the data stored in the first storage region; and a character image control means, for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc., for controlling the display of character images using the data stored in the second storage region. Data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by the text display setting information, for example, the character image control means provides text corresponding to, for example, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 for the first moving image such as the moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the second moving image different from the first moving image such as the moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11. It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image such as an image. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be able to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "hot", for example, and can change the second component related to the specific character image at a plurality of timings, as shown in FIG. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

For example, when a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple, for example, within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in the character or the display time range. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the lapse of a predetermined period can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that is an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode, and in the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, and the character image using the data related to the common character image can be added and displayed for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small pattern display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 is capable of, for example, pending display associated with pending numbers ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', and ``4'' in order from the right end, and the display area may be configured so that the first pending display is performed right-justified. The second pending display area 01AKB2 is capable of, for example, pending display associated with pending numbers '1', '2', '3', and '4' in order from the left end, and the display area may be configured so that the second pending display is performed left-justified. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and active display corresponding to the second reserved display erased (digested) in the second reserved display area 01AKB2 corresponding to the start of the second special prize game is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display, and for example, the active display may display a performance image common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display larger than each reserved display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern may be a reduced identification information image that is reduced in size from the identification information image that is the performance image showing the decoration pattern, and that can be variablely displayed in a mode that is partly or wholly common to each of the identification information images that show the decoration pattern. For example, when an identification information image indicating a decorative pattern includes a portion indicating a number and a portion indicating a character, the performance image indicating the small pattern is an image indicating the number corresponding to the same pattern number as the portion indicating the number included in the decorative pattern, and does not include the portion indicating the character, so it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler mode than the performance image indicating the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, the small symbols are displayed in a simple manner so that the display contents and display results of the small symbols can be prevented from being misunderstood by the player. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns as reduced identification information is performed, and finalized small patterns as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 9B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing commands for effects may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command instructing color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting a parameter according to the effect to be applied. For example, internal registers of the VDP 91AK132 store control data designating computation targets included in the display list, numerical data designating parameters, and other register values. By storing register values corresponding to execution commands, drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a combined reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the synthesized reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

In response to the command 01AKG02, when performing color blending for inverting color information, for example, the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by the image data, is subtracted from the maximum value (eg, 255). For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", then 255-80=175 is obtained, thereby inverting the color information. By executing the same difference calculation processing for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so as to obtain an image in which the color information is reversed.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using a plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data, for example, alpha blending is performed by performing synthesis processing by color blending, so that the image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to monochrome conversion.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. Using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data, for example, by performing synthesis processing by color blending such as alpha blending, an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different arrangement of textures.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. The layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL3, and draws an effect image showing the decorative designs in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 may be designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers may be designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, so that the display priority of the image is higher.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. Thus, a performance image drawn on a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value has a higher display priority than a performance image drawn on a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and can be arranged on the near side (front side) as seen from the player. On the other hand, a performance image drawn on a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than a performance image drawn on a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value, and can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen from the player. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and the display layer assigned a larger Z value may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z axis direction than the display layer assigned a smaller Z value, and the display priority of the image may be higher.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after superimposing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfer it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 for storage. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 may execute color blending according to any one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 may store images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 in a frame buffer for screen display while synthesizing the images respectively drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 according to the display priority by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blending for effect.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfer and store it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK 147. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, so that the images to be drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are combined according to the display priority and stored in the frame buffer for screen display. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers, by a drawing command. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

In this way, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . Further, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, and on the other hand, it is possible to draw an image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, in correspondence with the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfer and store it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK 147. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, so that the images to be drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are combined according to the display priority and stored in the frame buffer for screen display. In this case, an image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 as special layers and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 as specific layers can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effect and without changing the color information of the image data.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing commands for effect, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated as image data to be subjected to effect processing. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5A1, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first, and is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn, for example, by the drawing command included in the display list, and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read and superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information has been changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and can display various images for effects such as background images, effects images showing decorative patterns, effects images for increasing chances during reach. On the other hand, 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn by normal drawing processing without color blending for effects, and can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game, such as effect images showing pending display and active display, and effect images showing small symbols.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesis process.

FIG. 9-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for rendering with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can display an effect image by performing specific drawing processing such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 9-6B shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display the effect image by performing the specific drawing process, such as the difference calculation process of converting the value of the color information included in the image data. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by combining processing for performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including a command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by combining processing for performing color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When a display list including a command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data by combining color blending for blurring by rotation as specific drawing processing. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When a display list including a command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing processing. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image regarding the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to display, on a specific layer, a performance image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data and a performance image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. As a result, even an image for presentation drawn using common image data can be drawn by changing color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the drawing command for effect, so that various display presentations can be executed while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing, thereby improving amusement in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a setting example of the reliability of the big hit according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of cases where the variable display result is "big win" and controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big hit is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, it is sufficient to set the ratio of variable display results to ``big win'' differently according to a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances.

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach with a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized may be any display on the screen of the image display device 5, any sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, any light emission using the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or the LED for decoration, any action using the movable member for effect, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn according to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but a display effect capable of displaying an image drawn according to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect may be executed. The execution of the ready-to-win performance of super reach may include the execution of performance by displaying an image drawn only in response to a drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing performance.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect draws and displays an effect image that has undergone monochrome conversion using command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. In the color information inversion effect, command 02 among the effect drawing commands is used to draw and display an effect image in which color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and an image of a single color (for example, black or white) set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, it is sufficient if one of the plurality of drawing effect patterns can be determined at a rate corresponding to the variable display result and ready-to-win effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is designated, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing performance pattern, and based on the random value, determines the drawing performance pattern by referring to a drawing performance pattern determination table according to the variable display result and ready-to-win performance contents.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "losing", if the reach effect content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 60% (=60/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AK is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100). B01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5%=(5/100). On the other hand, if the variable display result is a "big win" and the content of the ready-to-win effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100). % (=20/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios in which the variable display result is "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the contents of the ready-to-win performance are any of the SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, when the result of the variable display is ``big win'', the ratio of determining the drawing performance pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the result of the variable display is ``losing''. Therefore, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, when a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display, is executed, the variable display result is ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the specific drawing performance is not executed. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 have a determination ratio set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is lowered. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine any one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display results. When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with lower reliability of big win than SP ready-to-B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win performances A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed to increase the ratio of control to the big win game state, so even in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the player's expectations can be increased by executing the specific drawing performance, and the interest in the game can be properly improved.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is the SP ready-to-win effect B, it is possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the content of the ready-to-reach effect is the SP reachable effects A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the contents of ready-to-win performance are SP ready-to-reach B, a limit may be provided as a limit that the specific drawing performance by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the contents of ready-to-win performance are from SP reach A1 to A3.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. In a performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or the drawing performance pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, it is sufficient that the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the output of BGM and sound effects. In addition, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative patterns are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the ``left'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, or when the decorative patterns constituting the pseudo-continuous chance are stopped and displayed in the ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the light emitting effects using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR may be executed, and light emission performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs may be executed in response to BGM or sound effect output during execution of the variable display.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed while the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0 regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or the pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR may be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. When the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed in the performance execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be returned to the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR in the performance execution period D4 for notifying the fixed decorative pattern, etc. to be the result of variable display. Also, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning before the variable display for executing the ready-to-win performance of super-to-win. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, it is sufficient that, in the same way as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2, for example, images drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, and images drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed on the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, for example.

When the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0 among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, the light emission performance using the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decoration LEDs can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, in the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing processing is executed, the light emission performance by the light emission of the light emitting member is made executable, while in the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing processing is executed, the limitation is provided as the limit that the light emission performance by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE by the effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emission performance, the amusement of the game can be improved by appropriate image display which enables the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing processing.

When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed in the performance execution period D2 or the like, the limitation is not limited to not executing the light emission performance by the light emission of the light emitting member, and the performance mode of the light emission performance may be restricted such that the performance amount of the light emission performance is reduced more than when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, a limit may be set so as to reduce the performance amount by lowering the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission performance than when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, a limit may be provided so as to reduce the performance amount by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emission performance as compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a limit may be provided to reduce the amount of effect by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 show an effect execution example when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the form of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win game is established. At this time, common decorative patterns corresponding to the number ``7'' are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the ``left'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R to establish a ready-to-win state, and the normal ready-to-win performance is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary to be able to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the performance execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, corresponding to the performance execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing performance pattern, the normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by the light emitting performance can be executed, and the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as a ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win performance with different performance contents depending on the result of variable display is executed, and fixed decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right''. In the case of the performance execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the performance execution period D3, the normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by the light emitting performance can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing performance pattern, and the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the performance execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the performance execution period D4, the normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by the light emitting performance can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing performance pattern, and the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of pause display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched for display, so that strobe display and temporary stop display can be performed. After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to and the light emission effect is executed.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. Thus, by making it possible to execute the specific drawing performance SPE by strobe display according to the drawing command even for the performance images drawn using the common image data, it is possible to give a different impression to the player than the normal drawing performance NOR, so that the increase in the data amount of the image data can be prevented, and various display performances can be executed to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 9-12(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM21 in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during execution of the in-reach chance-up effect. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance-up performance may not be executed by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of the performance execution example 02AKM05.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 9-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion and drawn by reducing the number of colors of color information by means of monochrome conversion arithmetic processing using image data, and a single-color image set differently from the image data, it is possible to perform strobe display as well as a specific drawing performance SPE by a monochrome conversion effect.

Effect display as a monochrome conversion effect can be executed without depending on dedicated image data by using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for performance is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute the specific drawing performance SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing command for effect, the impression given to the player can be made different from that of the normal drawing performance NOR, so that various display performances can be executed while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing to improve the interest in the game. Further, by combining the effect display as a monochrome conversion effect and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing, the impression of the display performance can be enhanced to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-13(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM31 in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM33 in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information reversal effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during execution of the chance-up effect during reaching, following the effect execution example 02AKM32. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, the temporary stop display of the chance-up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of the performance execution example 02AKM05.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. It should be noted that pause display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image by color information reversal obtained by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image by setting different from the image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing performance SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

Effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image drawn by converting the value of color information included in image data according to an effect drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even for a performance image drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute the specific drawing performance SPE by the color information reversal effect according to the effect drawing command, the impression given to the player can be made different from the normal drawing performance NOR, so that the increase in the data amount of the image data can be prevented, and various display performances can be executed to improve the amusement of the game. Further, by combining effect display as a color information reversal effect and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the increase in the data amount of the image data can be prevented, and the impression of the display performance can be enhanced to improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win performance is any of SP ready-to-win performances A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-reach performance of ``weak SP ready-to-win'' with a lower reliability of a big win than in the case of SP ready-to-win B is executed, while a specific drawing performance SPE that gives a sense of incongruity of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state increases, so that the expectation of the player can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved appropriately.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may not have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image which is a character image as a specific image, the contents of the drawing performance pattern and the determination ratio may be set so that the display result of the variable display becomes a ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than in the case of repeatedly displaying a single color image.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Further, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED may be provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member may be introduced through the end surface of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate, thereby executing a light-emitting display effect of displaying a predetermined pattern or the like. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information and the like may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient that the effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While the monochrome display of such reserved display and active display is enabled, when it is possible to execute a change effect of changing the display color of the specific display related to the variable display, such as the reserved display and the active display, if the change effect is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, when the display color of the specific display is changed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change performance includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change performance of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, and when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started at the timing when the reserved display is displayed, variable display and active display corresponding to the reserved display are performed, then the changing performance of the success pattern is executed, and when the display color of the active display is changed to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be finished and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or restarted.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, it is only necessary to draw and display a performance image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion performance is executed as the operation promotion performance for left-handed performance or right-handed performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. Then, in the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, it is sufficient that the first promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, it may be possible to draw and display a second promotion image on the direction display layer to prompt the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Thus, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction display layer only needs to be able to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image prompting the shooting of the game medium can be drawn and displayed by the normal drawing processing instead of the specific drawing processing, so that the visibility of the image prompting the shooting of the game medium can be properly ensured, and various display performances can be executed to improve the game interest.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, when it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the detection state of various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, the vibration sensor, the door opening sensor, the big prize door sensor, the full tank sensor, and the ball out sensor, the state of the payout board, the start port switch, the game ball detection state of the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error may be drawn and displayed. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. Thus, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing processing in the specific layer in the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, whereas the warning display layer only needs to be able to display the image drawn by the normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. A warning image informing the occurrence of abnormality can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that the visibility of the image informing the occurrence of abnormality can be properly ensured, and various display performances can be executed to improve amusement in the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and as a suggestion for the setting of the set value, it is only necessary to be able to execute a setting suggesting performance with different execution/non-execution and determination ratios of performance modes depending on the set value. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. Thus, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer only needs to be able to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The image suggesting the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in a special layer not by the specific drawing process but by the normal drawing process, so that the visibility of the image suggesting the set value with different advantages for the player can be properly ensured, and various display performances can be executed to improve the game amusement. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. Thus, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer only needs to be able to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in a specific layer by a specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the set value having different advantages for the player and improving the interest in the game.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) as a notification period during which the navigation notification for notifying the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result, an effect image that notifies the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device as the navigation notification. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order of stopping the variable display by the left, middle, and right reels, it is sufficient if a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. Thus, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, while the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the notification display layer. An image notifying an operation mode when stopping a variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that the visibility of the image notifying the operation mode can be appropriately ensured and various display performances can be executed to improve amusement in the game.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine that can execute a game, for example, a technique for tilting and deforming an effect image according to an instruction from a display list in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, such as the one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-171129, etc., and a technique for a game machine that draws a processed image in which multiple deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged, such as the one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-29947. It was done. In the game machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there is a possibility that the visibility of important images may deteriorate due to the change of the entire image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a game machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image,
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes storage means for storing image data, such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM 91AK147, and image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using image data. and a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, for example, a drawing process corresponding to a drawing command for effect. For example, in steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by specific drawing processing to display an effect image, and in step 01AKS04, for example, the special layer can be drawn by normal drawing processing and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be performed using a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may convert the value of the color information included in the image data and draw (for example, color information reversal), such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in effect control example 02AKC01, among a plurality of periods including a first period (for example, effect execution period D1) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as effect execution period D1, and a second period (for example, effect execution period D2), in which specific drawing processing is executed such as effect execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not emit light during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period (for example, effect execution period D1) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as effect execution period D1, and a second period (for example, effect execution period D2), in which specific drawing processing is executed such as effect execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in the normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6 that have different advantages for the player (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the set value change process S6A). Effect (for example, effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means (for example, CPU 103 for executing set value change processing S6A), such as CPU 103 for executing set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player, for example, values from 1 to 6, are provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are made by displaying a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effects such as effects according to production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. (For example, effects according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, in which an image is paused and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image (for example, see production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and variable display of the reduced identification information image in a manner smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. Display (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1) can be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image can be drawn and displayed by specific drawing processing, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute a game, and includes storage means for storing image data such as effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM 91AK147, and image processing means such as VDP 91AK132 that can execute drawing processing using image data. For example, a specific effect such as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect includes a first pattern such as a drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as a drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 that differ in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state. Of the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, according to the drawing command during the normal drawing effect. In a second period, such as an effect execution period D2, which is after the first period of the effect period in which the specific effect is executed, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process such as the drawing process corresponding to the drawing command in the specific drawing effect can be displayed in the case of the second pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the game interest.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, like the performance control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute the light emission performance by the light emitting means in correspondence with the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing processing in the specific performance, and it is possible not to execute the light emission performance in correspondence with the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing processing in the specific performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, the light emitting performance by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode corresponding to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing processing in the specific performance, and the light emitting performance may be restricted more than the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing processing in the specific performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to one of a plurality of setting values such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are performed by displaying in a specific mode. Good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6, which has a different degree of advantage for the player, is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are made by displaying in a specific manner, and setting suggestion effects such as effects according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effects. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and variable display of the reduced identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in the small design display area 01AKC1, can be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. The image may be rendered and displayed by a normal rendering process. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, in a configuration in which an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestive effect that is an operation effect in a suggestive effect mode, in a configuration in which the first component and the second component can be changed during the display period of a character image added to one moving image, or in a configuration in which a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added to a first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image, and can be displayed, a specific drawing process is performed on a specific layer to render an effect image. In the special layer that can be displayed and has a higher priority than the specific layer, it may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing with the normal drawing process, or in the second period after the first period, it may be possible to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process when it is the first pattern, and it may be possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process when it is the second pattern in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is different from the first pattern.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 comprises a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a base frame 3) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. A glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the frame 3 for the game machine so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The game board 2 may be formed of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board in a substantially square shape in a front view, and may be formed of a board board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the game board surface, which is the front surface.

An opening 2c is formed in the board face plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side (front side) through the opening 2c. In addition, an area overlapping the board 200 in the display area of the image display device 5 is visible through the board 200 .

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211 and the outer rail decoration 212 is defined as the game ball flowing down area in the game area Y. A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51. As shown in FIG.

A first effect unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at a position below the image display device 5 . A second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 . A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, the upper portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . A fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5 . In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 in which a game ball flowing down the game area Y can win a prize is provided at the right lower position of the board plate 200 .

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, they are visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board 200.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are positioned in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, at least at the front surface thereof, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that they can be visually recognized from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of the light guide plate device 500.例文帳に追加

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the light-emitting regions 506 are indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting regions 507 without dots (halftone dots) are indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area, an LED board 503 having a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for making light incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 being transmitted to the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. and a condensing lens 504 for condensing light towards. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51 .

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), and as shown in FIG.

In addition, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern in which light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. A non-light-emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light-guiding pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside and emits it from the front surface, that is, a non-light-emitting region that does not emit light due to the light that is incident inside the light guide plate 501 (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting area 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial peripheral edge appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting area 506 reflects the light and emits it forward, so that a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by light emission.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6B and 10-6C, the light emitting region 506 is formed on the back side in a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is shown enlarged to aid understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine uneven state that is difficult to see with the naked eye.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (see halftone dot region in FIG. 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting forward the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a and emitting from the front surface is a region in which a dot pattern is formed with a plurality of recesses 510, and the non-light emitting region as a second region not forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting light from the light guide plate LED 502 entering inside from the right end face 501a forward and emitting from the front face. A reference numeral 507 denotes an area where a dot pattern composed of a plurality of concave portions 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but other than these, other display information including decoration such as a pattern, characters, symbols, patterns, or patterns may be displayed.

When light is not incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end face 501a, the light guide plate 501 as a whole including the light emitting region 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a substantially semicircular uneven state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 may be configured by a molding method in which uneven portions are formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 by stamper or injection. In addition, the reflective part may be configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a groove processing method, or the like.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the rear surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 has a substantially semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The condensing lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending vertically from a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. A plurality of semicircular projections 504A that protrude toward the light guide plate 501 in a front view are continuously formed in the vertical direction on the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502 .

Incidentally, the protrusions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LEDs 502, and one protrusion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502, for example. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6C, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, since the front-to-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-to-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is incident on the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction (without light leakage).

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines forward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness is gradually reduced from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Also, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 . For example, the gap is of such a size that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation and use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. Emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 enters a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, even if the directivity of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is radially diffused in the horizontal direction within the condenser lens 504. Light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted rightward and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 can be expanded. In addition, since the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portions corresponding to the respective light guide plate LEDs 502 can emit light. Further, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while being repeatedly totally reflected in the front-rear direction, and finally emitted from the end face (the portion with the smallest front-rear width) of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side.

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction, so that the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

Light from the condensing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, whereupon the light is reflected toward the front side (player's side). As a result, when viewed from the player, the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, and the area represented by halftone dots in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). As seen from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first effect unit as viewed obliquely from the front. 10-9, (A) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10-7(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 10-7(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 10-7(A). 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is mainly composed of a base member 301, a cover member 302 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 301 and attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1, and an LED board 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the side of the player facing 75SG001.

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is oblong in a front view, and has black surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces). The front surface of the base member 301 has a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the flat portion 311 and shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and rear wall portions 313A to 313D positioned slightly behind the flat portion 311.

Above the flat portion 311, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 314A to 314E forming part of a decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D can be visually recognized between the projections 314A to 314E. Incidentally, the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to incline rearward upward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surfaces of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the concave portion 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LEDs 304 described later are positioned forward of the flat portion 311 . In addition, the concave portion 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, on the front surface of the LED board 303, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted, and a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic parts (not shown) are mounted. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front. At positions corresponding to the projections 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, and the recesses 322D are formed on the back surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B to accommodate the first effect LED 304. A light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the first effect LED 304 behind can be diffused and emitted forward. The concave and convex portions may be formed by sandblasting, diamond cutting, or the like, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decoration patterns 331 having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a decorative portion 331A formed of a plurality of lateral lines extending in the left-right direction, decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines extending obliquely to the left and right, a decorative portion 331D having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front. are provided continuously.

In addition, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E is formed, for example, by sandblasting the rear surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent seal or the like, so that the decorative portions 331A to 331E appear milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with the cover member 302. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to see the base member 301 and the front surface of the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 .

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 assimilates with the surrounding base member 301, and the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surfaces of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, and the front surfaces of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 can be easily viewed from the player side through the first translucent portion 321. As for the first effect LED 304, it is difficult for the player to see through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. In addition, by arranging the milky-white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky-white or translucent decorative pattern 331 can be seen on the front side of the black background.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. More specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the horizontal direction. It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, part of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decoration parts 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 is formed over almost the entire front surface of the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302, making it difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, since the decoration part 331A of each decoration pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, it is difficult to distinguish it from the boundary part BD because it is similar in appearance to the boundary part BD. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, the decorative portion 331A may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in the same linear shape as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 is similar (or common).

Furthermore, although the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, and are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since the printed wiring 320 is partially overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of linear protrusions forming a hexagonal shape that is flattened vertically is provided so as to be visible from the player side. Since the decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302, the wiring pattern is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined regions that can be visually recognized from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided with a decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern identical or similar to the decorative pattern 331 provided on the cover member 302. This makes it difficult to recognize that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 3 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is arranged in the recessed portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recessed portion 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5, so that the LED substrate 303 is located away from the image display device 5, which the player pays attention to, so that the LED substrate 303 is inconspicuous.

In this way, predetermined decorative patterns 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIGS. 10-12) are provided so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side, making the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side visible from the player side, etc., so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A).

As shown in FIGS. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701, and is configured as a unit in which the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the lower left. A game ball path 705B into which (game ball P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 having a plurality of performance LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light forward is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(First effect unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. 10-15 are diagrams for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. 10 to 16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5 so that the right end of the first effect unit 300 overlaps or approaches the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 when viewed from the player side. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board 200, while the first effect unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the board 200.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B (L1A>L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T-direction among the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 (T direction) is XA%. Further, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction out of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B is XB%. In other words, not all of the light (100%) that enters the first light transmitting portion 321 and the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and part of the light is reflected on the front surface, or emitted from the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around). In particular, the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of an uneven portion on the back surface, so that light is more likely to be transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first light-transmitting portion 321. Therefore, the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than that of the first light-transmitting portion 321 (light transmittance is low: XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and 10-14(D), in the cover plate 702A, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction out of the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (the T direction) is Y%. Here, since the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first light-transmitting portion 321 and the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is less likely to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the rear surface. Since the cover plate 702A is a flat plate without a light diffusion portion, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, it is better for the player to visually recognize a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 through the cover member 302 than to see a predetermined portion (for example, the game ball P) on the back side of the cover plate 702A through the cover plate 702A. Since the performance is low, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, is less conspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it have the same color (black), making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Also, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 in the T direction is the light transmittance of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. Since it is lower than (Y%) (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the visibility when the LED board 303 is viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is viewed through the cover member 702. The LED board 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a member, becomes more difficult to see. In addition, since the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around it, are of the same color (black).

Color has three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 3. Combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (neighboring colors) having the same tone (hue group having the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) but adjacent in terms of hue" will be described with reference to FIGS. becomes. Colors having a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when cyan (C) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward magenta (M) and 30 degrees toward yellow (Y) (total of 60 degrees) are colors similar to cyan (C). Colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference within an angle of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

Further, similar colors preferably include combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cool colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and neutral colors that are chromatic colors positioned between warm and cold colors such as green and purple.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 mainly includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, an LED board 403 attached to the front side of the base member 401, and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. As shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and has white surfaces (front, rear, and peripheral surfaces).

The LED board 403 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401 . A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, on the back surface of the LED board 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward, and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle type LEDs capable of irradiating light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403. The inner lens 405 is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403 and a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403. The light from 04B is made incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by the reflecting portion 406, and the light is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) such that a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which uneven portions are formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection, but the reflective portion may be configured by, for example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-like adhesive material, or a groove processing method.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 . At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a protrusion 410 having a shape slightly enlarging the LED board 403 in a front view is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of a letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a translucent colored paint, or by attaching a translucent sheet on which a letter is printed, or the like, so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 402A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In a region above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421A protruding to the back side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. In addition, in a region below the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421B protruding to the rear side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. A light diffusing portion made up of an uneven portion may also be formed on a portion of the rear surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the projection 410 upward and downward.

The plurality of ridges 421A and 421B have uneven portions formed continuously on the rear end surfaces thereof, and a stepped portion 421C is formed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. The projected light is diffused by the concave and convex portions and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emitted forward by the inner lens 405 is incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, so that the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of a base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if a light diffusion portion is formed in a portion other than the protrusions 421A and 421B of the cover member 402 from the player side, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 assimilates with the surrounding base member 401, making it difficult to distinguish the boundary BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 which is an electronic component and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. In other words, a part of the decoration part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that part of the boundary part BD is obscured by the decoration part 420, and the LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side visible from the player side, etc., so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 is provided so as to cover (overlap) the front side of the boundary portion BD larger than the decorative pattern 331 described above, making the boundary portion BD difficult to see, thereby making the LED substrate 403 inconspicuous.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially overlaps (overlaps) the positions corresponding to part of the upper and lower sides of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player side. In addition, it is preferable to provide so as to overlap about ⅓ or more of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, since the letter "V" is displayed as a logotype in the decoration part 420, the player pays attention to the logotype and becomes less conscious of the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, so that the LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the letter "V" indicating a big hit is exemplified as a logotype, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be letters indicating a variable display result such as "big win", "BONUS", and "RUSH", letters suggesting a big win such as "heat", "rapid heat", and "!!", and characters such as the model name of the game machine, the title, and the name of the character appearing. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second performance LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 is conspicuous due to the light emission, which makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative part 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative part 420 is conspicuous due to the surface light emission, which makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, so that the LED board 403 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is exemplified as one decorative portion composed of the letter "V", but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (e.g., patterns, etc.) different in form from the decorative portion 420 are provided in a region other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged more than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions. Large numbers are preferred. By doing so, the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see by the plurality of decoration parts, and the number of the boundary part BD is greater than the plurality of predetermined decoration parts provided in other areas, making the LED board 403 inconspicuous.

In this case, the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions may have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portions may be enlarged or reduced, or may differ in any one of the shape, shape, color, size, and the like.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a region other than the convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than that of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult for the player to see through the convex part 410 , so the LED board 403 becomes less conspicuous.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. 10-21, (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing (A) the state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) the state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 includes a base member 601, a cover member 602 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. 26 (A) and the production position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B) between the origin position shown in FIG. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front.

The LED board 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of an upright wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601 . A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 603 . The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Incidentally, the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and is arranged so as to cover the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged in front of the LED substrate 603 from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with a light diffusing portion 605A consisting of an uneven portion for diffusing and emitting the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front, thereby emitting surface light.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603 .

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of characters (logotype) of "XXX" is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough, for example, by printing with translucent colored paint or by adhering a translucent sheet on which characters are printed. A light diffusing portion 602A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the present embodiment, the characters "XXX" indicating a big win are exemplified as the logotype, but the present invention is not limited to this, and characters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, the name of the character appearing, characters indicating variable display results such as "big win", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big win such as "heat", "rapid heat", and "!!" may be used. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further diffused through the cover member 602 and emitted forward, so that the entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative part 620 emits light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are arranged at positions not corresponding to the decorative portion 620. By arranging the plurality of LEDs 604A for the third effect along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, the periphery of the characters "XXX" flashes when the LEDs 604A for the third effect emit light, so that the shape of the decoration part 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission effect portion 630, is an arm member in which one end is rotatably supported about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction and the light emission effect portion 630 is provided at the other end.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth effect unit 800 is mainly composed of a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803. As shown in FIG. , is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is shaped like a box with an open front surface. In addition, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller than the base member 801 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801 . A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803 . The fourth effect LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs capable of emitting light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803 , and are arranged along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803 . The surface of the LED substrate 803 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is placed in a region surrounded by the plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803 .

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the rear surface of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for forward reflection, and the light is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 . More specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211, but covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. A light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 802, and is made up of an uneven portion, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

Thus, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward through the inner lens 805 from the fourth effect LED 804 is further diffused through the cover member 802 and emitted forward, so that the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, in the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800, the surfaces of the base members 601 and 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are white, which is the same color. When 804 is turned on, the front surface is made to emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of a base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing portion 602A, the rear side can be seen through the cover member 602 from the player side. It is possible, but very difficult to see.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the standing wall of the same white base member 601 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, the LED substrate 603 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 601, and the boundary BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602 is obscure. In other words, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side is covered with the cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the cover member 802 is provided with the light diffusion portion 802A, the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803 can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover member 802.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 assimilates with the surrounding base member 801, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle LED that receives light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803. Therefore, the front side of the front peripheral edge of the LED board 803 including the fourth effect LED 804 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which the reflecting portion and the light diffusion portion are formed than the inner lens 605. The visibility when the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is viewed through the inner lens 805 is higher than the visibility when the player side views the LED board 603 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605. - 特許庁That is, the LED board 803 is more conspicuous than the LED board 603 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24 , the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20 ), and the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is forward (player side) of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23 ). 00, the fourth effect LED 804 emits surface light, while the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 emit flashing light (see FIG. 10-25). 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

As described above, the light emission effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is positioned close to the player, and emits light with strong light, so that the effect means has higher visibility than the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, since the third effect unit 600, which is a effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided near the fourth effect unit 800, the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth effect unit 800 and attracts the attention of the player, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is positioned closer to the player, and emits light with strong light. , the size when viewed from the player's side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emission mode are different from those of the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800, so that the visibility is high.

In addition, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 as the effect means may be easily improved by coloring the front surface of the light emitting effect part 630 with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, providing a decorative part with a highly visible color, or using the cover member 602 molded with a highly visible color. Further, the visibility of the light emission effect section 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emission mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

Further, as the effect means, the light emission effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 which can emit light by the light emission means and can be operated by the effect motor 631 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a light emission means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the game machine frame 3, an effect means which does not emit light by the light emission means, or an effect part fixed at a predetermined position without being operated by a predetermined drive source.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed in the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to protrude forward beyond the game board 2 and the glass window 50a. The projecting portion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing over the upper part of the game area Y. However, by projecting greatly forward, for example, in a state where the pachinko machine 75SG001 is installed on a game island of the game hall, the area E1 (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) below the projecting part 3A becomes dark due to the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the projecting part 3A.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 above the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are more likely to be lost in the shadow of the projecting part 3A, so that they are less conspicuous.

In addition, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protrusion 3A is provided that protrudes toward the player side more than the LED boards 603 and 803. Since the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 (see FIGS. 10-23), the LED boards 603 and 803 are shadowed by the protrusion 3A and become inconspicuous.

In addition, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 have been exemplified as being white, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark (for example, black).

In the present embodiment, the projecting portion 3A projecting toward the player above the LED boards 603 and 803 is used as the projecting portion projecting toward the player above the electronic components and the specific member. device, etc.) or a performance device. Further, the projecting portion 3A is not limited to being fixed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but may be a projecting portion that projects toward the player above the electronic components and specific members by moving from the origin position to the projecting position at a predetermined timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is formed so as to overlap front and back with respect to most of the movement region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26) when the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move.

Specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emission effect part 630, and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or invisible from the player side through the light guide plate 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light from the light guide plate 506 during the movement period at least during which the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position and during the effect period during which the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 are positioned at the effect position. It is possible to suppress conspicuousness of the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the line.

When the light guide plate LED 502 is extinguished and the light emitting effect of the light emitting area 506 ends after the light emitting effect part 630 moves to the effect position, the power transmission member 632, the cable C and the like become visible, but the power transmitting member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous by lighting the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the light emitting effect part 630 to make the light emitting effect part 630 conspicuous.

In addition, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) operably provided in this way may be visible from the player side during the waiting period in which they are waiting at the origin position or during the movement period, but it is preferable to make them difficult or invisible from the player side at least during the effect period in which they are positioned at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic parts from becoming conspicuous during the presentation period in which the player pays attention.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG of the present embodiment,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
By doing so, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the specific members of the same color make the electronic parts less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
It should be noted that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to arbitrary colors as long as they have similar colors. In addition, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may be of the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 provided with light-emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are applied as electronic components. Including the main board 11, the production control board 12, the relay board, etc.), sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring) and other electronic components, and boards and members that fix them.

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a different member (for example, a member forming a part of another unit, a member forming a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, etc.) provided separately from the housing unit (device).

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting a part of the unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated are applied as translucent members, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is a member provided in the electronic component, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific members partially overlap the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic parts on the back side, and the non-overlapping parts are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803. They may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without partially overlapping when viewed from the side. In addition, as long as the specific member is arranged around the electronic component and can be seen when viewed from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member may be arranged apart in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-back direction, and the like.

In addition, the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position where the electronic component can be visually recognized from the player side, for example, it may include a specific member arranged within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component.

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as translucent members. Further, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color, as long as the player can visually recognize the electronic parts and the specific member through the member. Also, the light transmittance may not be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In the characteristic part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members exemplified a form in which a player can see through the members part or all of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic parts and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members. As long as the electronic component and the specific member are provided so as to be visible through the member, even if at least a part of the specific member is not made visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be provided so as to be visible together.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members are arranged along the electronic components and the specific members on the front side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic components and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific members. It does not have to be arranged in such a way that In other words, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the entire surfaces of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 have a predetermined color (black or white), but the present invention is not limited to this. may not be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific members may be colored when the members are molded, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be given a predetermined color by affixing a seal or the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. , first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (e.g., members for fixing first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. 22A, the second starter switch 22B, members for fixing the solenoids 81 and 82, etc.).

In this way, for the predetermined electronic parts such as the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the solenoids 81, 82, which are provided so as to be invisible or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member for fixing them, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to a color that has the same hue and has a higher lightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

In addition, by coloring the light-transmitting member with the same color as the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

In addition, for example, when electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component is provided on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, separately from the specific members provided around the electronic component, so that the player can visually recognize it. It can make it difficult to stand. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member having the same color as the electronic component or a similar color to the electronic component separately from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK are made executable in the image display device 5, the electronic components of the first effect unit 300, the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 described in the characterizing portion 75SG provided around the image display device 5 become inconspicuous, so the effect can be favorably displayed.

Specifically, for example, as described in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, the light emission effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LED can be executed. 403, 603, 803) and a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, a position closer than the game effect lamp 9) using the second light emitting member provided in the periphery (for example, the position closer than the game effect lamp 9, etc.) is not executed (or the light amount is made lower than the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to prevent electronic parts and specific members from being rather conspicuous by executing the light emission performance using the second light emission member when the light emission performance using the first light emission member is restricted.

In addition, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the light amount may be maintained (the execution may not be limited) even when the light emitting member that is inconspicuous even if the light emission is continued is controlled so as not to execute the light emission effect using the first light emitting member, such as the second effect LED 404A that can cause the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member to emit surface light. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic parts and the specific members inconspicuous without excessively lowering the presentation effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed in the game machine so as to be circulative. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and may be a non-spherical game medium such as medals.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine, but for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value, and one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, and a prize can be generated according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) for the player, and electronic components (eg, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and electronic components (eg, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided around the electronic components and formed in the same color as the electronic components. A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801), a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member, and a display means (e.g., image display device 5). ) and the specific member (for example, base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12), the electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is provided at a position more distant from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of base member 301), and further, light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash) display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., occurrence of start winning), a specific display effect (e.g., a portion in which the pending display or active display is displayed in any of the display patterns α to γ) and a specific light emitting effect (e.g., flash effect at the time of winning) that emits light from the light emitting means. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that lights the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the front), the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the specific lighting effect is performed is higher than when the specific lighting effect is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the winning flash effect is performed, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not performed). 135SG009F), and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect) and from the predetermined time to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display ready-to-win effect that is the target of the winning flash effect) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, and blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. part), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, and with the brightness C2 and the period T0 during the period of executing the flash effect at the time of winning the second period. Blinking part) A gaming machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display targeted for the specific light emitting performance, and in the first period of the specific light emitting performance, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means are caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, thereby making the specific light emitting performance more conspicuous, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display targeted for the specific light emitting performance.

In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and to provide a game machine in which a player can easily recognize a specific display, which is the target of a specific light emission performance, by means of the light emission mode of the light emission means. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that looks good when installed in a game arcade and whose effects are easy for the player to understand.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and make it easier for a player to recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific lighting effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player, and light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, and a win-time flash lamp). 135SG009F), display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display, specific display effects for displaying the specific displays (e.g., a portion in which the pending display or active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., occurrence of start winning), and a specific light emitting effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (e.g., flash effect at winning). (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the win flash effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the win flash effect is not executed), and the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, the winning flash lamp 13). 5SG009F), and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term) and the second time from the predetermined time to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect. During two periods (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display ready-to-win effect that is the target of the winning flash effect), light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, and blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 during the late winning flash effect execution period). The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the first prize winning flash performance, and blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the second winning flash performance execution period. Part) gaming machines are mentioned. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(form)
The game machine of form A1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a portion in which the pending display or the active display is displayed in any of the display patterns α to γ, a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emitting effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect for winning a prize), based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a start winning);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that lights up F),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-24, when the flash effect is executed when winning, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed when winning).
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d),
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the first prize winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, a period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). As shown in 5-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and blinks with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the second winning flash effect execution period),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term, and blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the second term. part) and @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and in the first period of the specific light emitting effect, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, thereby making the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous, so that the player can more easily recognize the specific display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect section in which the appearance effect of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution processing, so that the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed), and a predetermined after the appearance effect. 15-15, FIGS. 15-30(D) to 15-32(H), and FIGS. 15-49(B) to 15-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotating display effect execution processing, thereby displaying the suspended display and the active display as a rotating animation).
The timing when the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-20, the portion where the rotation animation of the suspended display and the active display starts from the timing when the appearance animation of the suspended display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), when executing the specific display start effect B, the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9 as the winning flash effect from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. part where d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means can display the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top, and a specific display display start effect B that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after the character A acts on the first reserved display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A),
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), the winning flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission performance can be started before the appearance performance ends regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the player can surely recognize the specific display targeted for the specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emission effect after temporarily controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A), 15-29 (B), 15-49 (A), and 15-49 (B), when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is once displayed). , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
The "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only the state of emitting light at low luminance but also the state of not emitting light.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emission effect after temporarily controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is once reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built into the image display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the display is lowered by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means, as long as the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state during execution of the variable display, and capable of executing the specific light emitting effect when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n) and Figs. The part where the flash effect can be executed at the time of winning),
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (previous effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), and a specific light emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (B)),
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the variable display sound is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when executing the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive performance is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance makes it easy for the player to recognize the execution of the specific light-emitting performance.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means outputs a specific light emission effect corresponding sound from the sound output means before any of the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means in the specific light effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. After the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts from R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display completes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-12, when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined according to the start winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts, and the appearance animation of the hold display and the active display is completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
The specific light emitting effect is a effect in which the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a specific mode with a lower degree of emphasis than the predetermined mode in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. Winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emission performance, and the first light emitting means can prevent other performances from being hindered and the interest in the game from being lowered due to the first light emitting means continuing to emit light in the predetermined manner even in the second period.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28 , the execution period of the flash effect at the later stage includes the period during which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and the period during which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission performance, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode with a lower degree of emphasis than the first display mode during the second period. 5 where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic, during the first period, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emission performance by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the first display mode on the display means, and by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second display mode in the second period, it is possible to prevent the display means from continuing to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the first display mode, which hinders other displays and lowers the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to form A13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the portion that displays the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode during the first period, and outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second output mode in the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a second output mode lower in intensity than the first output mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speaker 8l during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning. , the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the first output mode, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission performance has started, and during the execution of the specific light emission performance, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emission means stops light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-69 as modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the late winning flash effect. , extinguishment of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, non-display of the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clearing of the late winning flash effect process timer, etc., during the pattern fixing period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the late winning flash effect, the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is issued. Based on the received information, the late winning flash effect process table is selected again and the process timer for the late winning flash effect process timer is reset and started, thereby starting the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the winning time, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emission means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect executed in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. During the temporary stop period of the pattern, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in the second period in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A) to 15-89 (n) as the modification 135SG-1, even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where F continues blinking with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emission means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where 5SG009F continues blinking),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued even in the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display which is the object of the specific light emission performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to form A20,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of first effect identification information (e.g., decoration pattern) and variably display of second effect identification information (e.g., small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information in the display means,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-33 (J), etc., during the symbol fixing period, the small symbols are displayed with the variable display stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A21,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. The part displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect until the specific lighting effect is started when the specific lighting effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and when the specific lighting effect is started, the first light emitting means starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific lighting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is lit at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to form A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, as shown in Figs.
The first light emitting means enters a low luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low luminance state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes across the low luminance state accompanying the switching to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change of the light emitting mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIG. 15-90) and an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low luminance state when executing the action suggesting effect, and after entering the low luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, which is the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The part where F is lit at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-108(A) as modification 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner according to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to the specific light effect effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-108(B) as modification 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which the flash effect is being executed, lighting (blinking) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is continued in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect may end at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect or at a second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. The end timing includes the timing to start the movable body movement effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the reach effect of Super Reach).
When the emission of the first light emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C) as modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body action presentation from the start timing of the movable body action presentation and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-win presentation from the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine according to form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means differs depending on whether the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing or the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 as modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the light emission mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, the movable body operation effect is being executed and the super reach It may be during the execution period of the reach production),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The effect execution means can execute a first effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIG. 15-119 as a modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect different from the first effect (for example, a super reach reach effect shown in FIG. 15-119 as a modification 135SG-4).
The first light emitting means is
As the first effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light effect can be changed to the light emission in the mode according to the first effect. The part that changes the light emission mode),
In accordance with the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the second effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect).
The ratio of control to an advantageous state when changing from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode corresponding to the first effect and when changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner corresponding to the second effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case where the light emission mode is set in accordance with the movable body action presentation from the start timing of the action presentation and the case where the light emission mode is set in accordance with the ready-to-win presentation from the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a motion effect for moving the movable body (for example, a movable body motion effect), a motion suggesting effect for suggesting execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect), and a specific effect for suggesting control in an advantageous state (for example, a reach effect for super reach),
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change the light emission from the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode according to the action suggestion effect along with the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect).
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect at the time of winning).
The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific lighting effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, and the ready-to-win effect. The part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the percentage of control to be in an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-17, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5, the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of executing the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, the proportion of the winning flash effect being executed is higher than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the specific light emitting performance is executed at a high rate, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine according to form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red, as shown in FIGS. 15-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-5, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ depending on whether the flash effect at the time of winning is executed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the specific light emitting performance is being executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine according to form A31 or form A32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a portion capable of executing a first effect effect and a second effect effect shown in Modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is performed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-5, the second effect effect is a portion in which the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ),
When the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emitting effect is executed at a higher rate than when the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-5, when the second action effect is executed, the part where the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting performance is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and to increase expectations for the change suggesting performance to be executed in the second mode by executing the specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine according to form A33,
In the special embodiment, the first special embodiment is executed in the 2nd constitution and the proportion of the special form is low (for example, 135SG -5, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. Includes a second special form (for example, 135SG -5 deformed as 135SG -5) in FIG. 15-120.
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of executing the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the portion where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and since the specific light emission performance is executed at a high rate in the second special mode in which the rate of changing to the special mode is high, the expectation for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode can be enhanced by the execution of the specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means can display a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a winning flash effect can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine according to form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific luminous effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes on the image display device 5 as flash effects at the time of winning),
The manner in which the specific display overlaps differs depending on the type of the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-129(L) and 15-130(N) as modification 135SG-7, the overlapping manner of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs according to the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine according to form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display targeted for the specific light emission effect is started, and can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the variable display targeted for the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-7, before the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect is displayed. A portion that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the pending memory display area 135SG005D, and displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during execution of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, so that the player can be given more unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The display means can display a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and can display a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the specific light-emitting effect so as to overlap with the re-variable related display (for example, when a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, a special symbol that stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbol temporarily stops (see FIGS. 15 to 40, etc.) as a flash effect at the time of winning. The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can overlap and be displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-42(a) to 15-47(l), the portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and effect control is possible to end the light emission at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends (for example, as shown in FIG. , the part that turns off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not ended at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, special end control is performed to end the light emission of the first light emitting means at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the timing is later than the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), the part that ends the flash effect at the time of winning, including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine according to form A40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information that notifies the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the CPU 103 can transmit a symbol confirmation command that designates the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the late winning flash effect based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, a part where blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot stop blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the start winning to the first start port occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific luminous effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and can execute the specific luminous effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is longer than the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-8, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is If is less than or equal to the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, the part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-9, a portion that can execute a super reach ready-to-win effect even in a variable display in which the variable display result is lost),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in the variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the variable display next to the variable display (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-8, if the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display result of the variable display is changed. Part that can execute flash effect at the time of winning from the start timing of the next variable display on the condition that it is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is satisfied by passing the game medium;
a specific light-emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the pending display or active display can be displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ with different expectations of big hits),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed. The part that emits light in the color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ until the end of the variable display based on the starting prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine according to form A46,
The number of light emission modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emission modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there are many light emission variations of the specific light emission means, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine according to form A46 or form A47,
The light-emitting area of the first light-emitting means is larger than the light-emitting area of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the portion where the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is set larger than the light emitting area where the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect),
The period during which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1 is longer than the period during which the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the holding display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is targeted for the starting winning flash effect after the start winning occurs. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display, the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light until the end of the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning) after the start winning has occurred),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for an advantageous state by the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means for a long time while preventing the deterioration of the interest in the game due to the light emission according to the specific light emitting performance by the first light emitting means being executed for an excessively long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the portion where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can blink, and the portion where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink as shown in Modification 135SG-10),
The blinking cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the part that makes the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S different from the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the flashing periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, '7', the actual pattern differs depending on the type of big win to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a 'big win', and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, '2') different from the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state in the case of some big winning types (the number of opening times of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big winning opening is the same, etc.). In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "general game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to the display or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect using any effect device including part or all of these may be performed.

As a performance executed in accordance with the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started in response to the start of the first special game or the second special game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards include not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.).

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and may be outputted using any one of the power monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in a performance control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery processing in step S904. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and when the special patterns are fluctuating, for example, the fluctuation of the special patterns can be restarted from the state before the stop.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is established in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, the shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of losing symbols or display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is established in the setting change processing of step S907, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the staff member of the game parlor, etc., the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, and control to the setting change state is possible. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF or if the setting key 51 is OFF, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 is executed while the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process of step S904 is executed while the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage. If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 14B shows a configuration example of the second special figure display result determination table used when the variation special figure is the second special figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of 'big win'. Thus, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probability-variable state in which variable-probability control is performed, the probability of deciding to control to a big-win game state is higher than in a low-probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the determination values are assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as 'small win' and controlling to the small win game state has the same value regardless of the game state or set value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state and set values, the determination values are assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a 'minor hit' to be controlled to the small win game state is the same value different from that of the first special figure display result determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big win determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the ``big win'', and only the common numerical range of the big win determination value for judging the big win is set, while in the case of the set values 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big win determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big win determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value when the game state is the variable probability state. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', so that only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set, while when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state when the game state is the variable probability state. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the variable probability state is 65% (so-called variable loop type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200 and the game balls pass through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. Based on this, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to the probability variable state, and the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big win game is changed according to the variable special figure (so-called V probability variable type), and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the big win probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time reduction control). It is good also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed type) which controls to a jackpot game state based on passing the predetermined switch provided inside. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided while the probability of a big win or a small win is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3, while the number of winning balls obtainable during the big win game is small. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the winning ball device 6A.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 15-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can display the number of the second special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating the game state and the effect during execution. 05Sa.

Then, the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending storage number, and a display of the second special symbol pending storage number. Constitutes a third display area 135SG005Sb.

At the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decorative design can be displayed variably. A small pattern 135SG005M having a size smaller than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. In the small patterns, patterns corresponding to the decorative patterns displayed in the ``left'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the ``middle'' decorative pattern display areas 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5R are vertically arranged. Further, the small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

In this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-3, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 15-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a decoration pattern (also called a performance design) variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is “loss”, “big hit” or “small hit”, and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be when the variable display result is “big hit”.

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the variable probability control is performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which the time reduction control is performed but the variable probability control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-low base state, no time-shortening probability-variable state) while the time-shortening control is not performed while the probability-variable control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the fourth game state-designating command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-shortening probability variable state) in which both the time-saving control and the probability-variable control are performed.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot state described later.

Command B100H is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the start winning (first start winning) is generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) being generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, for example. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is established, for example. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big win type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and whether it will be a small win. Command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number value for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "others" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The commands shown in FIG. 15-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and commands different from these commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls in each prize opening, a gate passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the variable probability control or the time reduction control is executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the random number MR4 for normal figure display result determination are controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 15-10, to update various numerical data by software.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as a ``jackpot'' to a big win game state, and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``1'' to ``65536''. The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to any one of ``probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', ``probability variable jackpot C'', and ``non-probability variable jackpot'', and takes a value in the range of ``1'' to ``100'', for example.

A random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is a random number value used for determining one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``1'' to ``997''.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of the normal pattern display is a random value used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is ``win in the normal pattern'' or ``lost in the normal pattern'', and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``3'' to ``13''.

FIG. 15-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure and the second special figure may use separate special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a table referred to for determining, based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" to a big hit game state before deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the characteristic part 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is the judgment data assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big win game state as a ``jackpot''. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the characteristic part 135SG, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of ``jackpot''. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "big hit" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state (about 1/300 in the feature part 135SG). 1/30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state), the data for determination is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

In addition, FIG. 15-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed, it is a table that is referred to for determining whether to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is the judgment data assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the special figure display result to a small winning game state as a ``small hit''. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the special figure game of the first special figure and the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small winning", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is not assigned to the "small winning". Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the high base state in which the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is generated by executing the time-saving control, and the second special winning opening is frequently executed, "small hits" hardly occur, and in the high base state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is in a high base state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small win in which a large number of is not obtained, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.

FIG. 15-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the characteristic part 135SG is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types based on a random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control to a jackpot game state with the special figure display result as ``big win''. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that is variablely displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is "non-probability variable big hit", "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 135SG will be described using FIG. A ``variable probability big hit C'' that shifts to a low probability base state and a ``non-variable probability big hit'' that shifts to a low probability and high base state after the big win game state is ended are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big win game state by ``probability variable big win B'' is a normal open big win in which rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated five times (so-called five rounds). The big win game state by the ``probability variable big win C'' is a normal open big win in which the land for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). In addition, the big win game state by ``probability variable big win C'' and ``non-probability variable big win'' is a normal opening big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the ``variable probability big hit A'' may be called a 10 round (10R) probability variable big hit, the ``variable probability big hit B'' may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit, and the ``variable probability big hit C'' may be called a 2 round (2R) probability variable big hit.

Also, although not shown, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is 0.1 second. In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big-win game state is ended, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state due to the ``non-probable variable big win'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 135SG) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, the allocation of the determination value to the jackpot types of "probable variable big hit A", "probable variable big hit B", "probable variable big hit C", and "non-probable variable big hit" is different. That is, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of ``81'' to ``100'') is assigned to the jackpot types of ``variable probability big hit B'' and ``variable probability big hit C'' with a small number of rounds. With such a setting, when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. and the percentage determined to be the "probability variable jackpot C" can be varied. In particular, in a special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open big hit state or a high speed open big hit state with a small number of rounds as ``variable probability big win B'' or ``variable probability big hit C'', so for example, high opening control accompanying time saving control avoids frequent occurrence of a big win state in which the number of prize balls to be obtained is small in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. can be prevented from declining.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the "non-probability" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "probable variable big hit B" and "probable variable big hit C" differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine than when it is a special game.

Incidentally, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit types of ``variable probability big hit B'' and ``variable probability big hit C''. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special pattern, a judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special game of the first special pattern may be assigned to the jackpot types of "probable variable big win B" and "probable variable big win C". Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic part 135SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is 'non-reach' and 'reach' among the cases where the variable display result is 'loss', and the case where the variable display result is 'big win' or 'minor win'. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach-loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this characteristic part 135SG, as the normal reach variation patterns, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance described later is not performed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance described later is performed once, are executed. Further, as the super ready-to-win variation pattern, a common super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance is executed in a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance to be described later is performed twice and a super ready-to-reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance to be described later is performed three times. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one kind of ready-to-reach effect is provided as the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach.

The variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small win" or the variable display result is "big win" and the big win type is "probability variable big win C".

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic part 135SG includes a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is not executed, in which decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is executed once during variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display.

In this characteristic part 135SG, since the variable display result is set to "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation for big hit is set to be high, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of simulated continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined by first determining the type of variation pattern, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , In addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characterizing section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -4 (fluctuation pattern of 3-time super reach pseudo-consecutive effect big hit). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the variation pattern determination table B for the big win is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table B for the big win PB1-1 (variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of the one-time jackpot of the pseudo-continuous normal reach effect), PB1-3 (variation pattern of the two-time jackpot of the pseudo-continuous effect of the normal reach), PB1-4 (three times of the pseudo-continuous effect of the normal reach). variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 15-9, the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous performance, when the variable display result is the probability variable big win, more pseudo-continuous performance is more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable big win. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, when the variable display result is a small hit, a special winning variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern) using the special winning variation pattern determination table.

In addition, when the variable display result is "lost" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss to determine the variation pattern PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of one time loss of normal reach pseudo continuous effect), PA2-3 ( It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 2 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of losing 3 times of pseudo continuous effect of super reach).

In addition, if the variable display result is "lost" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss to set the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time loss), PA2-3 ( It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing 2 times super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous effect) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of missing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

In addition, when the variable display result is "lost" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table B for loss to set the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time loss), PA2-3 ( It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 2 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of losing 3 times of pseudo continuous effect of super reach).

In addition, when the variable display result is "lost" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table C for loss to determine the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time loss), PA2-3 ( It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing 2 times super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous effect) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of missing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

In addition, if the variable display result is "missing" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to select the variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach short time shortening variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss variation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time deviation variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times deviation variation). pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous performance).

In other words, when the variable display result is "missing" in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of the normal non-reach loss. It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 135SG is provided with a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 135SG152, a game control timer setting unit 135SG153, and a game control counter setting unit 135SG15. 4, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this manner indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and serves as suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) is generated. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and shows the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data and the like are stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage part 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and becomes the suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening may be stored in a common holding storage part in association with the holding number. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 135SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. Stores numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for general pattern display result determination as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may update the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may update the random count value by subjecting all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104 to predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in, for example, FIG. The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 135SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 135SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") is provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storage of the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-1" to "2-4") is provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, four commands, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands, an area for storing symbol designation commands, an area for storing variable category designation commands, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and a winning flash effect target flag indicating whether or not it is a target for a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the area and the number of reserved memories in association with the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory.

As for the storage contents of these storage areas (entries), when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started, the content (data) of the reserved memory satisfying the start condition is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the content (data) of the pending memory satisfying the start condition is copied, so as shown in FIG. That is, there are provided an area for storing a start opening winning designation command, an area for storing a symbol designating command, an area for storing a variable category command, an area for storing a pending memory number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and an area for storing a winning flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a winning flash effect is to be performed.

In the present characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending memory number notification command based on the start winning are stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), based on the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening It is determined whether or not the switch 22B is on (step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the top of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B when the starting opening buffer value is "2".

Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the kind of big hit are used for judging whether or not the result of variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be ``big hit'', and to judge the kind of big hit when the result of variable display is ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up winning designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is finished.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 135 SGS 113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process proceeds to step 135SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 15-12 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic part 135SG, when variable display of special symbols and decoration symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "big hit" to the big win game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS 112, thereby determining whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big win" and in which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbols will be, and based on the determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. performs advance notice effects such as pre-reading notice effects as will be described later. will be executed.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152, for example (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 may specify the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specify the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specify the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with each determination value one by one, so that it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the big hit determination range to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the big hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at step 135SGS123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135SGS125; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result of "small hit", is executed (step 135SGS126), and a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 135SGS127). Then go to step 135SGS138.

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result "loss", is executed (step 135 SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (step 135 SGS129). . When the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the change pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set, and when the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the change pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In this feature section 135SG, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A and variation pattern determination table D, a variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the number of retained memories is 3 and a variation pattern determination table C used when the number of retained memories is 4 are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the patterns within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, and in the variation pattern determination table for failure, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned from the range that the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 800 decision values up to 9 are assigned. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super reach, within the range of possible random number values MR3 for variation pattern determination.

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved storage changes after the determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit B, the fourth design designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit C, the fifth design designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit C, and the fifth symbol designation command in the case of the non-variable jackpot (step 135 SGS133), and then whether or not the determined jackpot type is the non-variable big hit. (Step 135SGS134). When the determined jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any one of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, the variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 using each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern (step 135 SGS 138). As shown in FIG. 15-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and such a variable category is determined based on the random value MR3. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 15-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 15-14, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., and determines whether there is a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command at step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning designation command (step 135SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command in step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; Y), if the received command is the symbol designation command in step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; Y), step 135S If the received command is a variable category command in GS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), if the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command in step 135SGS228 (135SGS228; Y), and if the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is the start prize shown in FIG. 15-11. The time reception command buffer 135SG194A is also stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In step 135SGS233, specifically, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is being executed, the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation memory number notification command (first reservation memory number notification command or second reservation memory number notification command) are received, the reservation memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

At step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any one of the start winning prize designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the empty area of the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and if no command for notifying the number of reserved memories is received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memories for which the command for notifying the number of reserved memories is not received may be set to be excluded from the pre-reading notice performance to be described later.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then executes the specific display display start effect as the display start animation of the pending display in the active display area 135SG005A, the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 135SG005U, and the display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Specific display start effect execution processing (step 135 SGS162) for the purpose is executed. In addition, after the specific display display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect execution process for executing a winning flash effect (step 135 SGS163), and a specific display rotating display effect execution process for executing a specific display rotating display effect as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the pending display or active display after the specific display start effect ends (see FIGS. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)). (Step 135SGS164), when it is determined to execute a holding display forewarning effect as a pre-reading notice in the characterizing section 135SG, until the variable display based on the holding memory that is the target of the holding display forewarning effect ends, a starting lamp light emitting effect execution process (step 135SG165) is executed for executing the starting lamp lighting effect for causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the holding display/active display based on the holding memory. , one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each suspension display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and processing for shifting the suspension display to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 15-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 15-15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), it is determined whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243). When the pattern designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is specified from the variation category command of the entry (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or the active display is white), 5% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 0% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ (display of the pending display or the active display). decides to run the aspect in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time, it is decided not to execute the pending display forewarning effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or the active display is white), 20% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 0% of the time, it is determined to execute the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is out of place and the floating category is super reach, it is not executed in the holding display notification of 65 % (display pattern α with white display or active display display form α), and a 25 % ratio is displayed (hold display or activation or activity. It is decided to execute the display form in blue), and it is decided to execute a holding display notice at a ratio of 10 % with the display pattern γ (reddish display form of the holding or active display).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or the active display is white) at a rate of 15%, to execute the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 30%, and to execute the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red) at a rate of 55%.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the ratio of the target variable display result to be a big hit (jackpot expectation) is highest when the pending display or active display is displayed in red, and the ratio of losing the target variable display result is highest when the pending display or active display is displayed in white (jackpot expectation according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red>blue>white).

Returning to FIGS. 15-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the decided display pattern (step 135SGS247), and the prefetch notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y), and if it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect. Step 135 (SGS248), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display are exemplified as a form in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode for the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as the pending display forewarning effect.

FIG. 15-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 15-15 as the specific display display start effect execution processing. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251). Incidentally, whether or not either the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed may be determined by whether or not a process timer for specific display display start effect A or a process timer for specific display display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation.

When the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. Also, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (263SGS273), and it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), it is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

When the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, when the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; N), a process table for specific display start effect B corresponding to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display) is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution processing.

When the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (the process timer for the specific display display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display display start effect B) (step 135 SGS260), and subtracts 1 from the process timer for the specific display start effect (the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed). has timed out (step 135SGS261). When the process timer for specific display start effect under execution has not timed out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect under execution (step 135 SGS262), and the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated.

If the specific display start effecting process timer being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the specific display start effecting process timer is the final specific display start effecting process timer (step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the last specific display display starting processing process timer is not timed (step 135SGS263; n), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display display and starting production, and the following according to the process data of the process data for the following specific display display production. Control the device (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and terminate specific display display start production execution process.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a starting prize occurs and it is determined based on the starting prize not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect), or when the starting prize is a start prize to the second starting port, the active display area 13 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 15-19 (A) and 15-19 (B), FIGS. At a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in 5SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the specific display display start effect A.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A shifts to the rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A or the suspended storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U as the above-described specific display rotating display effect, like the other suspended displays and active displays.

In addition, when a starting prize occurs, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first start opening, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the starting winning, or when the first special figure reserved memory already exists, the animation of the character A moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), an animation is displayed in which the character A attacks (acts on) the position where the reserved display is displayed based on the start winning. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display start effect B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the hold display is about 0.2 second. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the reserved display based on the starting winning. After the end of the specific display start effect B, the reserved display shifts to a rotating animation display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect, like the other reserved displays and active displays.

When the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start performance B, if the variable display is not executed at the start winning timing and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist, an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, as in FIGS. 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), the position where the active display is displayed based on the starting winning, that is, the animation of the character A attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the active display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotating display effect described above.

FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 15-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and determines whether or not there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" in these start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, pending display. It is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

When there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). When the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, whether the game state is a big win game state or a small win game state (step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super reach or not (step 135SGS277).

When the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether or not variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

When the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or when the ready-to-win performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines execution/non-execution of the winning flash performance based on the variable display result. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 15-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 15-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). When the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined (step 135SG279b; Y), the flag for flash effect at the time of winning of the entry (entry in which the flash effect object flag at the time of winning is not set) is set to "1" indicating that the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is reserved storage (step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the game effect lamp 9 are flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds after the occurrence of the start winning (as shown in FIGS. lighting and extinguishing at luminance C1, which is luminance, are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. The sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the characteristic part 135SG is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of the first winning which is output during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of the latter term which is output during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the latter term winning. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second), such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be output repeatedly. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, can be simultaneously output from the speakers 8L and 8R at different volumes using different channels.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), if the effect control process flag is neither 0 to 3 (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135S) G279; Y), when it is decided not to execute the flash performance at the time of winning (step 135SG279b), the flash performance target flag at the time of winning of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the flash performance at the time of winning is not an object (step 135SG279c), and the flash performance execution processing at the time of winning is ended.

Further, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize win is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize win has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for flash performance at the time of the first prize does not time out (step 135SGS286; N), the CPU 120 for performance control controls the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of the first prize being executed (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the last process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes process data switching, starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning, and controls the effect device according to the contents according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), Go to step 135 SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F is blinked in a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the flash lamp at the time of winning 135SG009F is emitted in the image display device 5 from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the early stage to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. This is an effect of displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S of the imitated character A. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit white or red light in the same manner as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. In addition, since the flash effect for the late winning is carried out with a lower brightness than the flash effect for the early winning (see FIG. 15-28), the actual lighting mode of the flash lamp for winning the prize 135SG009F in the flash effect for the late winning is darker than the flash effect for the early winning.

As shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) repeats turning on and off (blinking) at a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning. In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, as shown in FIGS. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

In step 135SGS284, if the process timer for flash effects at the time of early winning is not in operation, that is, if the process timer for flash effects at the time of late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for flash effects at the time of late winning by -1 (step 135SGS298), and determines whether or not the process timer for the flash effects at the time of late winning is timed out (step 135SGS298). 135 SGS299). When the process timer for flash performance at the time of late winning is not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for flash performance at the time of late winning being executed (step 135SGS300), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the last process timer for flash performance at the time of late winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for flash performance at the next late winning is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, when the last process timer for flash performance at the time of late winning is timed out (step 135SGS301; Y), the first process timer for flash performance at the time of late winning is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, whether or not the variable display being executed is the variable display for the winning flash effect (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter term, turns off the flash performance execution flag at the time of winning (steps 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and ends the flash performance execution processing at the time of winning.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol determination command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash performance at the time of winning is ended, the flash performance execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash performance execution processing at the time of winning is ended. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the characteristic part 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is a effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period elapses until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the late winning, the flash performance at the time of the winning including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning can be finished again at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol determination command) which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win performance.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 15-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 15-22, in this characterizing section 135SG, the effect control CPU 120 selects one effect process table as the process table for the flash effect at the time of the first winning, and selects one process table for effect as the process table for the flash effect at the time of the later winning. In other words, as the performance pattern (performance period) of the flash performance at the early stage of winning and the flash performance at the time of late winning of the characteristic part 135SG, the flash performance at the time of the early stage winning and the flash performance at the time of the late stage winning are always executed in the same performance mode and the same performance period regardless of the number of reserved memories or the like.

FIG. 15-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) corresponding to the process timer (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). 2, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the first term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice performance execution processing, for example, when the CPU 120 for performance control executes the variable display start setting processing, whether or not to execute the notice performance during execution of the variable display and in which performance pattern the notice performance is to be executed should be determined, and the notice performance can be executed according to the result of the determination. Further, when the performance pattern of the notice performance is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display, so that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state may differ depending on which performance pattern the notice performance is executed.

The effect executed as the forewarning effect in the characterizing portion 135SG is a dialogue foretelling effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 creates the image data of the next display screen of the left, middle and right decorative patterns (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has passed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched) and writes it in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after step 135SGS366 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer is not timed out, if a fixed command reception flag indicating the reception of the pattern fixed command is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special prize winning process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if a variable display time timer is not timed out, control is shifted to stop variable display when a pattern determination command is received, so that even when a variable pattern specifying command indicating a long variable time due to noise or the like between substrates is received, variable display of decorative patterns can be terminated when a normal variable display time elapses (when variable display of special patterns ends).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table is terminated.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device when executing the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-28 to 15-68. First, FIGS. 15-28 are timing charts in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. FIG. 15-28 is a timing chart corresponding to both the case where the execution of the holding display forewarning performance is decided when the execution of the flashing performance at the time of winning is decided based on the starting prize and the case where the non-execution of the holding display forewarning performance is decided. FIGS. 15-29 to 15-48 are diagrams showing effects in the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and execution of the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect is determined based on the starting winning. FIGS. 15-49 to 15-68 are diagrams showing effects in the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the starting winning, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined.

15-29 to 15-48 ``When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect'' shown in FIGS. This refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the prize-time flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the decoration pattern is variably displayed on the image display device 5, and the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. Further, during execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink at the period T0 corresponding to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)).

Further, during the execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the notice performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the notice performance, and the sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the notice performance (for example, the sound corresponding to the notice performance such as the sound of the character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

When a winning to the first starting port (starting winning) occurs during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, the first flash effect at the time of winning is started as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (B).

First, as shown in FIG. 15-28 and FIG. 15-29 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-30(C) and 15-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the stick lamp 135SG00. 9X, blinking control of the button lamp 135SG009Y with period T1 is started. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the first winning flash effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-30 (D), 15-31 (E), and 15-31 (F), as the above-described specific display display start effect B, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F controlled to blink is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, an animation is displayed in which the character A attacks (acts) the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (the position where the fourth reserved display is displayed in the case of the characteristic part 135SG).

After the character A has acted on the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display and execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the starting winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started prior to the completion of the display of the hold display based on the start winning. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanying the execution of the specific display start effect B in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (see FIGS. 15-32(G) and 15-32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. 15-28, 15-32 (G), and 15-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-32 (G), and 15-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2, and the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1) is started. Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

At the end timing of the flash performance at the time of the first prize and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the second prize, the light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) corresponding to the flash performance at the time of the first prize of the game effect lamps 9 (the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y as the flash performance at the time of the first prize ends. Then, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is switched to a mode corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 (blinking at the brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y returns to the light emission mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term based on the end of the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0, as described above, in the same manner as the manner before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term (light emission manner shown in FIG. 15-29(A)). If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a reddish color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2>T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

15-32(H), 15-33(I), and 15-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG is displayed while the black image 135SG005B, which is transparent to the entire first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 except for the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed in an overlapping manner. 005S is displayed. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when it is displayed overlapping with the black image 135SG005B. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red, the degree of expectation for big wins may be changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 15-32(H) and 15-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small symbol 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player can confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small symbol 135SG005M regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed or not during the execution of the winning flash effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), 15-34 (K), and 15-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed on the image display device 5 in a combination indicating a deviation (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one by one in the right direction. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-34(K) to 15-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the winning at the volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. Executed repeatedly.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (S) to 15-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-40 (W). In this characteristic portion 135SG, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbols notifying the temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative design display area 5C). As the winning flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are derived and displayed in the image display device 5 in combination indicating the failure (displayed in the state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed in the image display device 5 even during the design determination period, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-40 (W) and 15-40 (X), during the period of temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, blue with luminance C2), and returns to the light emission mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Furthermore, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so that the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-42(a) and 15-42(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect when winning is started, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display displayed in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-43(c) to 15-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-43(d) and 15-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (see FIGS. 15-45(g) to 15-46(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-46 (j)), the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 15-45(g) and 15-46(j), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue with brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, green with brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to the light emission mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (e.g., red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop period of the third decorative pattern, and return to the light emitting mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-48(m) and 15-48(n), when the ready-to-win effect starts due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). , reach production is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

At the white-out timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are finished.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y ends at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d start to emit light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting at luminance C1).

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from 8L and 8R, and no sound is output, and from the timing of the whiteout, the flash lamp for flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9B, Attack lamp 9C, movable lamp 9D, which described above. As the light emitting form (lighting at the brightness C1) according to the start, the output of the reach production corresponding sound, which is a sound that is accepted according to the reach production, starts from the speaker 8L and 8R. Incidentally, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, if the start of the start of the variable display is executed and the execution of the holding notice of the holding display is determined based on the prize, the starting port lamp will be launched, and the starting outlet lamp 135SG009S will respond to the display pattern of the suspension display notice. The light emission starts with the colored color (for example, if the display pattern of the holding display is the display pattern β, and the display pattern of the holding display is the display pattern γ).

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-described flash performance at the time of winning, and regardless of the flashing mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance from the time of the above-mentioned starting winning to the end of the variable display of the target of the lighting performance of the starting port (variable display of the target of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the variable display corresponding sound at the volume V2. Further, during execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at the period T0 corresponding to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)).

Further, during execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the advance notice performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the notice performance, and a sound (sound corresponding to the notice performance) corresponding to the performance pattern of the notice performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

When a winning to the first starting port (starting winning) occurs during such a variable display, and execution of the pending display forewarning performance and execution of the winning flash performance are determined based on the starting winning, as shown in FIG. 15-28 and FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 15-28 and FIG. 15-49 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2), and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-50(C) and 15-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the stick lamp 135SG00. X, button lamp 135SG009Y starts flashing control at period T1. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the first-term winning flash effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-49(B), 15-50(C), and 15-50(D), as the above-described specific display start effect A, an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the target of the winning-time flash effect (previous winning flash effect), gradually appears from the bottom to the top (see FIGS. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 15-29 to 15-32). That is, when the specific display display start performance A is executed, the display of the reserved display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start performance B is executed, and the rotation animation is started.

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display and execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the starting winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started prior to the completion of the display of the hold display based on the start winning. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-52 (G), and 15-52 (H), as the late winning flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2, and the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1) is started. Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

At the end timing of the flash performance at the time of the first prize and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the second prize, the light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y as the flash performance at the time of the first prize according to the flash performance at the time of the first prize (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is switched to a mode corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 (blinking at the brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y returns to the light emission mode before the start of the previous winning flash presentation based on the end of the previous winning flash presentation. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0, as described above, in the same manner as the manner before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term (light emission manner shown in FIG. 15-29(A)). If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a reddish color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2>T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

15-52(H), 15-53(I), and 15-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the black image 135SG005B, which is transparent to the entire first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 except for the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed in an overlapping manner. 005S is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-52(H) and 15-53(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small symbol 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player can confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small symbol 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-53 (J), 15-54 (K), and 15-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in the image display device 5 in a combination indicating a deviation (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-53 (J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one by one in the right direction. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-54 (K) to 15-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the winning at the volume V2 is output, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5. is executed repeatedly.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-58 (S) to 15-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-60 (W). In this characteristic portion 135SG, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbols notifying the temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative design display area 5C). As the winning flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination indicating the loss (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern fixing period, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 15-60 (W) and 15-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode is returned to the light emission mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Furthermore, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so that the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-62(a) and 15-62(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect when winning is started, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display displayed in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-63(c) to 15-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 15-63(d) and 15-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (see FIGS. 15-65(g) to 15-66(j)).

As shown in FIGS. 15-65(g) and 15-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue with brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, green with brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and returns to the light emission mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with a luminance of C2) corresponding to the temporary stop of the third decorative pattern during the temporary stop period of the third decorative pattern, and return to the light emitting mode according to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-66 (j)), the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-68(m) and 15-68(n), when the ready-to-win effect starts due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). , reach production is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

At the white-out timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are finished.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y ends at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the timing when the whiteout ends.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from 8L and 8R, and no sound is output, and from the timing of the whiteout, the flash lamp for flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9B, Attack lamp 9C, movable lamp 9D, which described above. As the light emitting form (lighting at the brightness C1) according to the start, the output of the reach production corresponding sound, which is a sound that is accepted according to the reach production, starts from the speaker 8L and 8R. Incidentally, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win) is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the holding display is completed, so that the player recognizes the holding display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. It's getting easier. Further, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention are provided, and as shown in FIG. In the middle, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C2 and the period T2, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the first prize, and flash at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the latter term. b, the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d also blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous, so that the game can more easily recognize the hold display which is the target of the winning flash performance.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize occurs during variable display, whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute the reservation display notice effect is determined for the reserved memory based on the starting winning. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Specifically, when a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, as the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B, after executing the appearance animation of the active display of any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ (the display pattern when the pending display notice effect is not executed or the display pattern when the pending display notice effect is executed) in the active display area 135SG005A, the rotating display of the active display is executed as the specific display rotating display effect, and the variable display is performed based on the starting winning effect. Winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) may be executed based on the start of .

15-15, FIGS. 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and FIGS. 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the specific display display start effect includes a portion where an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B) to 15-50 As shown in FIG. 15-19 and FIG. 15-20, the rotation animation of the pending display is started at the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display is completed, so that the player's attention to the pending display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), when the specific display start effect B is executed, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light as the winning flash effect from the timing before the start of display of the reserved display, the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. 15-49(A) to FIG. 15-50(D), even when the specific display display start effect A shown in FIGS. 15-49(A) to 15-50(D) is executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light as the winning flash effect from the timing before the display start of the reserved display, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds, and as shown in FIGS. Since the performance can be started, the player can surely recognize the pending display which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29(A), 15-29(B), 15-49(A), and 15-49(B), when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash effect is performed by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once. The player can recognize the start of

In this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning. F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be changed to emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, the luminance is C3, which is lower than the luminance C2). In other words, the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at a low luminance, as well as a state in which they are extinguished (not emitting light).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n) and FIGS. 15-49(A) to 15-68(n), during the variable display, the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not, and the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash performance at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice performance, the sound corresponding to the notice performance is output at the volume V2 and the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear it, so that the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning by the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, as a form of outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2. While the sound corresponding to flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, the sound corresponding to notice effect and the sound corresponding to variable display may be output at a volume lower than volume V2 (for example, volume V3).

In addition, in the present characteristic part 135SG, the form of outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning need not be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the notice performance is started during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice performance or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice performance and the sound corresponding to the variable display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), and 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), when execution of the winning flash effect is determined in accordance with the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the pending display animation is completed. By outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the player can quickly recognize the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the present characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. can be

As shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first period, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C2 (C1>C2) during the execution period of the flash effect at the later period, so that at least the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C1. The start of the hour flash performance can be recognized, and the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash can be prevented from flickering at luminance C1 even during the execution period of the flash performance for the latter winning, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 lower than the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 longer than the cycle T1 as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" as the flash effect at the late winning. That is, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG includes both a low-speed flashing mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle) and a low-brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009 in the late winning flash effect. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in F may be only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning includes the period in which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and the execution period of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. It becomes easy for the player to recognize the game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the image display device 5 displays an effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the effect image 135SG005E continues to be displayed by the image display device 5, which hinders other displays and lowers the interest in the game.

15-30(D) to 15-31(F) and 15-34(L), etc., the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in a brighter color than the silhouette image 135SG005S, and the display area of the image display device 5 is also wide. I can.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the second prize, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 81 and 8R at the volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning at the volume V1 as the flash performance at the time of winning, the player can easily recognize that the flash performance at the time of winning is started, and by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning at the volume V2 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the latter period, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the hindrance of other performances by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this characteristic part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2 during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, thereby suppressing the decrease in the game interest due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. may be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n), while the late winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking during the symbol fixing period of the variable display before the start of the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol fixing command is received (the fixing command reception flag is set) or the variable display time timer. By continuously flashing the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize even during the pattern fixing period, regardless of whether or not the timer has expired, the player's expectation for being controlled to a big win game state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash performance for winning a prize, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the feature part 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a mode (brightness C1 and cycle T1) corresponding to the first winning flash effect as the first winning flash effect. While the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and cycle T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. continues, the small symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in combination to indicate a failure, so that the player can be made aware that it is during the symbol fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the overlapping display on 35SG005M.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, pseudo-continuous effects including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols can be executed on the image display device 5 during variable display. In the case where pseudo-continuous effects are executed in variable display during the execution of flash effects at the time of winning, the special symbols (see FIGS. 15-40, etc.) that stop in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, silhouette images 135SG005S as flash effects at the time of winning are displayed in duplicate. Since it is possible, by hiding the special symbol behind the silhouette image 135SG005S, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-42(a) to 15-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect, and the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. When it is not possible to determine that it is the start timing, since the flash performance at the late stage including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is finished again at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern fixing command) which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, the discomfort when the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win performance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect object due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 terminates the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, so that the feeling of discomfort when the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning is ended can be further reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is not determined, so that it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the reduced attention to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any one of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different degrees of expectation for big hits, and as shown in FIG. irrespective of the flashing of the lamp and the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like, light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start prize to the end of the variable display based on the start win, so that the player can recognize the display mode of the pending display or the active display also by the light emission mode (light emission color) of the start port lamp 135SG009S, so that the game interest can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, the late winning flash effect in the characteristic portion 135SG has been exemplified as being executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period (while the variable display is stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. The display of 35SG005S and the like may not be executed during the symbol determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A), during execution of the variable display, the decoration pattern is variably displayed on the image display device 5, and the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. Further, during execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at the period T0 corresponding to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)).

Further, during execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the advance notice performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the notice performance, and a sound (sound corresponding to the notice performance) corresponding to the performance pattern of the notice performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

When a winning to the first starting port (starting winning) occurs during such a variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the winning flash effect are determined based on the starting winning, the first flash effect at winning is started as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (B).

First, as shown in FIG. 15-69 and FIG. 15-70 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2), and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-71(C) and 15-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the stick lamp 135SG00. X, button lamp 135SG009Y starts flashing control at period T1. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the first winning flash effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-71 (D), 15-72 (E), and 15-72 (F), as the above-described specific display display start effect B, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F controlled to blink is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the position where the fourth reserved display is displayed) is displayed.

After the character A has acted on the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, when a starting winning occurs during variable display and execution of a winning flash effect is determined based on the starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started before the completion of the display of the hold display based on the starting winning. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (see FIGS. 15-73(G) and 15-73(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-73 (G), and 15-73 (H), as the flash effect at the time of winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V2, and the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning at the time blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG0. The game effect lamp 9 except for 09Y blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)), and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, a blue color gradation, and if the background image is an evening image, a red color gradation, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2>T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-74(I) and 15-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B having transparency to the entire first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A is displayed in an overlapping manner. .

As shown in FIGS. 15-74 (J), 15-75 (K), and 15-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in the image display device 5 in a combination indicating a deviation (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-76 (M) and 15-76 (N), during the pattern fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect for the late winning and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are stopped. , only the blinking of the movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is continuously executed.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one by one in the right direction. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 15-75(K) to 15-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the winning at the volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, during the pattern fixing period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of the latter term at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-79 (S) to 15-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-81 (W). In this modification 135SG-1, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbols indicating the temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative design display area 5C). , output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed as the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

In FIG. 15-81(W), during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed. Blinking at T2 is to be executed. In other words, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in the image display device 5 as a combination indicating the loss (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S with the black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed even during the pattern determination period, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the winning flash effect sound at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-81(W) and 15-81(X), during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension, so that the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-83(a) and 15-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at winning is started, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display displayed in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-84(c) to 15-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 15-84(d) and 15-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (see FIGS. 15-86(g) to 15-87(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-87 (j)), the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-89 (m) and 15-89 (n), when the ready-to-win effect starts due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). , reach production is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

At the white-out timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are finished. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

As shown in FIG. 15-69, if the start of the start of the variable display is executed, and if the execution of the suspension display notice is determined based on the prize prize, the starting port lamp 135SG009s will be the starting dedicated lamp, the starting outlet lamp 135SG009S will respond to the display pattern of the suspension display notice. The light emission starts with the colored color (for example, if the display pattern of the holding display is the display pattern β, and the display pattern of the holding display is the display pattern γ).

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-described flash performance at the time of winning, and regardless of the flashing mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance from the time of the above-described starting winning until the end of the variable display of the target of the flash performance at the time of winning (the variable display of the target of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this variation 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is stopped during the symbol fixing period. has become Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning and during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern of the variable display which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is continued, thereby preventing the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is finished even though it is during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output, the flash effect for the flash for winning the prize 135SG009F is turned on, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S is stopped. If it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the display is being executed, only one or two of the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the late winning flash performance, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be executed.

Further, in the modification 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the late winning flash effect, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., are not executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the late winning flash effect based on the receipt of the symbol confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. The flash lamp 135SG009F may not emit light and the silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command, thereby starting the flash effect for the late winning (output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning, light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the late winning flash effect, sends the lighting control data to the lamp control board 14 instead of the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the late winning flash effect, instead of the winning flash lamp 135SG009. The lighting control data for keeping F turned off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating turning off as the RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until the variable display start command is received.

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle from the start timing of the new variable display (see FIG. 15-69), or the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound and the winning flash lamp 135S may be executed again from the new start timing of the variable display. The lighting of G009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, when the variable display ends during execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect for the late winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, while the background images displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed. Although the flashing in the mode has been exemplified as a form in which the flashing continues, the present invention is not limited to this, and flashing of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may also be stopped during the pattern fixing period. In particular, as a form of stopping blinking of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d during the design determination period, the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off during the design determination period, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, a color corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5) during the design determination period. It may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 15-8, it is described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as the ready-to-reach effects of super reach. However, in the case of providing a plurality of ready-to-win effects as the ready-to-win effects of super reach, the expected degree of big hit is made different between the ready-to-win effects of the plurality of super reach (for example, as the ready-to-win effect of super reach, the expected degree of big hit is higher than the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α. A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, when it is possible to execute the ready-to-win effects of a plurality of super-ready-to-win effects with different degrees of expectation for big hits, as shown in FIGS. 15-90(A) and 15-90(B), the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and an effect position (for example, a center front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is super ready-to-win. In the case of variable display with a variation pattern of α (variable display that executes a ready-to-win effect of super reach α), it is suggested that the movable body 32 is moved to the effect position by repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the effect position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is once whited out. When the movable body action suggestive effect is executed and the variable display to be flashed at the time of winning is the variable display in the super reach β variation pattern (variable display for executing the super reach β reach effect), the movable body action suggestive effect is executed while the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out, and then the movable body 32 is further moved from the retreat position to the effect position. You may perform a performance.

In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body action performance is executed), the player can be notified that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big win than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the moving-body motion performance to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-91(B), 15-92(C), and 15-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (see FIGS. 15-93(E) to 15-94(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-94 (H)), the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-95 (I) to FIG. 15-96 (L), when the reach production is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F is once white out (1st display area 135SG00G00G05F (1st display area 135SG 0 The production image displayed on 05F is hidden once, and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (A) and FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-97 (N), during the white-out period, lighting of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive effect. Then, as the movable body operation suggesting effect, the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2), the movable body operation suggesting effect ends and the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect, a sound effect (for example, a rattling sound) or the like that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggestive position may be output.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90(A), 15-98(O), and 15-98(P), from the timing when the movable body operation suggestive effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F light up with the luminance C1 in the manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect. is started, and the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIGS. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-99(B), 15-100(C), and 15-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (see FIGS. 15-101(E) to 15-102(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-102 (H)), as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning time flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-103(I) to 15-104(L), when the ready-to-win effect starts due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). do. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B) and FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-105 (N), during the white-out period, lighting of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive effect. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect ends based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position may be output.

After completion of the movable body motion suggesting effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-90(B) and FIGS. 15-106(O) to 15-106(P), the white-out period ends, and the movable body 32 is moved from the retreat position to the effect position by a drive mechanism (not shown) as the movable body motion effect. It should be noted that during the period of the movable body action presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are lit at the brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body action presentation. Although not shown in FIG. 15-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 15-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 15-90(B), 15-107(Q), and 15-107(R), from the timing when the movable object action effect and the whiteout are completed, the super reach effect β starts in the image display device 5, and the brightness C1 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a mode corresponding to the reach effect. Lighting is started, and output of ready-to-win effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach β is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the ready-to-win performance corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win performance of super reach β, BGM or the like different from the sound corresponding to variable display or the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the ready-to-win performance of super reach α may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β is being executed.

As described above, in this variation 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win which is the target of the flash effect for winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, and the lamp for flash to win the prize 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Since the lamp 135SG009F emits light (illuminates at the brightness C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the game interest in the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-98 (O) and FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-106 (O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout), and during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG00 is turned off from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. By lighting 9F with the brightness C2, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the white-out period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished according to the execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, and thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on according to the movable body motion effect execution (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). The light is turned on at the brightness C1 in the mode. In other words, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the luminance C1 after turning off due to the execution of the performance suggesting the operation of the movable body.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, a form in which a speech notice effect can be executed as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 135SG-3, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages in addition to the dialogue notice effect, and a step-up effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the final number of change steps, or a step-up effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win differs according to the final number of change steps, or a group of characters with a plurality of image display devices 5 The present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a crossing group forewarning performance or the like.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modified example 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-108(A), 15-109(A) to 15-113(L), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at the timing of displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or at the timing of changing the image in stages. may be temporarily turned on at the luminance C2 to enhance the effect of the step-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-108(B) and FIGS. 15-114(A) to 15-118(F), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning 135SG009F has already been executed at the brightness C2 and the period T2. The flash lamp 135SG009F is not lit, that is, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning which has already emitted light in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning may not be made to emit light in the manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

As described above, in this variation 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, that is, when the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is already blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 as the flash effect at the time of winning and the step-up effect of turning on the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is started further, the flash lamp 135S at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since flashing of G009F is preferentially executed, it is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash from starting lighting in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the flash performance at winning.

In the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to notify the player.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, as shown in FIGS. 15-119(A) and 15-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, when the winning-time flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super-reach, the lighting mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the win-time flash effect to the light-emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which of the light emission modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, it is decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect at a rate of 70% from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode of the prize flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. When the variable display result of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is not correct, at the time of starting the variable display, it is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning from the mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning to the light emission mode according to the motion effect of the movable body at the rate of 30% at the start timing of the movable body operation effect, and at the rate of 70% from the timing at the start of the ready-to-win effect, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning emits light. It is decided to change the mode from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

When it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the process data corresponding to the determination may be selected, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, there are cases in which the movable body action effect is being executed and in which the super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is being executed. I can. In particular, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. It can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-4, the degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect). , the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed at either the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning or the start of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach, and the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between when the ready-to-win performance is started and when the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win performance is set, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, the movable body motion effect can be executed before the start of the ready-to-reach effect of super reach. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between the case of setting the lighting mode in accordance with the movable body operation suggesting performance and the case of setting the lighting mode in accordance with the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, and the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The light emission (blinking) of SG009F may be terminated at the start timing of the motion suggesting performance of the movable body and at the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, and the degree of expectation for big win may be changed according to the timing at which the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is completed. Even when a plurality of timings are provided to stop blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect during the variable display in 1, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot stop blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the winning flash lamp 135SG000 will be restarted at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings. The flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period including the flashing of 9F should be ended.

Thus, even when the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize as a flash performance for winning a prize cannot be ended at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting performance or the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, the flash performance for the latter period of winning including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize can be ended at the end timing of the variable display of the object of the flash performance for winning a prize.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific displays (suspended display and active display), a white round display pattern α with the lowest jackpot expectation is provided, a blue round display pattern β with a higher jackpot expectation than the display pattern α, and a red round display pattern γ with a higher jackpot expectation than the display pattern β, and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher jackpot expectation than the display pattern β are provided. Other display patterns may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display patterns α to γ, the display pattern δ is a white flashing round shape that may change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at any timing during the display as the suspension display or the active display (expectation of change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ: low), the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at any timing during the display as the suspension display or the active display. It is also possible to provide a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε that is more likely to change than the display pattern δ (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high).

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display patterns α to γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, and the display pattern α (white display) has the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation of a big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation of a big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α, or the degree of expectation of a big win may be set higher than that of the display pattern α and lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided as the suspended display and the active display pattern. Further, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, in the characteristic part 135SG, the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect (display pattern β or effect of displaying the active display in the display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined regardless of the determination of the execution of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as the above-described modified example 135SG-5, when execution of a winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, the display pattern β is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern γ, and the display pattern α is determined as the display mode of the hold display or active display based on the start winning. It may be determined at a low rate (decision rate of the display pattern when execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined: display pattern ε>display pattern δ>display pattern γ>display pattern β>display pattern α).

As described above, the display pattern α to display pattern ε are provided as the display modes of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the winning flash effect is more likely to be executed together than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. Since the player's attention can be drawn, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white round shape, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circular shape, the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circular shape, and the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white blinking circular shape, so that the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and flashing mode.

In this variation 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, there is no description of the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The rate of change to the pattern γ may be different. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the winning flash performance is executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special mode (display pattern δ) of the specific display in the present invention may be a color other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention (for example, purple, black, etc.).

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is suggested to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In particular, in the case of an action effect, there are a plurality of effect effects in which the ratio of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is different (for example, a first effect effect in which the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ), and the first effect effect is an effect effect in which the effect effect differs, and the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is specified at a higher rate than the first effect effect. A second action performance capable of changing the display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may be provided, and when the second action performance is executed, the winning flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first action performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which action performance is executed by the first action performance or the second action performance, and to heighten expectations for the execution of the action performance by the second action performance by executing the flash performance at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the winning flash effect is more likely to be executed than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. Therefore, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the winning flash effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in Modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of a specific display (suspended display and active display), and the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to a display pattern β or a display pattern γ by executing an action effect on the character as the specific display. The display pattern γ may be changeable.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-121 (A) and 15-121 (B), when the first special figure reserved memory number is 3 and variable display is performed, a prize (start prize) to the first start opening occurs, and the display pattern ε of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win. Along with being displayed, the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 15-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display is terminated and a new variable display is started. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-122(A) and 15-122(B), when the friendly character (holding display of display pattern ε) displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. .

15-122(C) and 15-122(D), the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, and the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves one position from the display position of the second reserved display. In the case of moving to the display position of the eye pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Further, when the variable display ends and the variable display which is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the friend character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first reserve memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A, and the friend character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (the battle effect between the friend character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-123(G) and 15-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the active display of the friendly character changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ in the active display area 135SG005A. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-123(I) and 15-123(J), when the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the active display of the enemy character or ally character changes to display pattern α in the active display area 135SG005A.

In the modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friend character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby changing the active display of the friendly character to the active display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By defeating the enemy character while being displayed in 05D, it is possible to change the ally character as the pending display to the pending display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε may be changed to the pending display (or active display) of the display pattern β or γ at a higher rate in the case where the flash performance at the time of winning is executed than in the case where the flash performance at the time of winning is not executed. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to draw the player's attention to whether or not the flash presentation at the time of winning is executed during execution of the battle, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, as the display pattern of the suspended display and the active display, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. Effect B should be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed with the display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 15-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α. What is necessary is just to perform a display start production. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, the player recognizes the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed, as in the characteristic part 135SG.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Good.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-124 (A) and 15-124 (B), when the first starting opening wins (starting winning) during the variable display in the state where there are three first special figure pending memories, and it is decided to execute the holding display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, As shown in FIG. 15-124 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 15-124(B), as the flash effect at the time of winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2), and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-125(C) and 15-125(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E is started from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 1. Blinking control of 35SG009Y is started at period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the first winning flash effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-125 (D), 15-126 (E), and 15-126 (F), as the above-described specific display start effect B, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F controlled to blink is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, an animation is displayed in which the character A attacks (acts) the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (the position where the fourth reserved display is displayed in the case of the characteristic part 135SG).

After the character A has acted on the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-127 (G) and 15-127 (H), as the flash effect for the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V2, and the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize blinks at a luminance of C2 and a period T2 (period T2>period T1), except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y. The flashing of the game effect lamp 9 with the brightness C2 and the period T2 (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)), and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals is started.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, a blue color gradation, and if the background image is an evening image, a red color gradation, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2>T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-128(I) and 15-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B that is transparent to the entire first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A is displayed in an overlapping manner. has become

As shown in FIGS. 15-128 (J), 15-129 (K), and 15-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in the image display device 5 in a combination indicating a deviation (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-128(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one by one in the right direction. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 15-129(K) and 15-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 may be displayed larger than the previous variable display. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 15-130 (M) and 15-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M in the image display device 5 are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the pattern confirmation period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

In the modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning. The invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may be overlapped and displayed only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the overlapping mode of the silhouette images 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A is different according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-7, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. A case where the overlapping area with the active display area 135SG005A is different (for example, a case where only a part of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S and a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, there is provided a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the winning time displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is set. The silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap with the pending display which is the target of the flash performance, and during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the active display which is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be further given unexpectedness to improve the game interest.

In this modified example 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect when winning.

Further, in the modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, but the present invention is not limited to this. A silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping the special symbols (see FIGS. 15-40, etc.) to be stopped in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C when temporarily stopped. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for informing the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-7, as the re-variable display effect in the present invention, the form of stopping in the decorative symbol display area 5C in which the special symbol is "medium" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the re-variable display effect, it is possible to display an image different from the special symbol on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping the image.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution), but the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning may not be determined (determined to be non-execution). In this way, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning the first prize (the flash performance at the time of the first prize winning) is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific display (reserved display or active display) of the object of the flash performance at the time of winning from becoming difficult to understand.

In the modification 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize is determined based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous term. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in this variation 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined. In addition, the winning flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, two light emission modes are provided as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect: blinking with brightness C1 and period T1 (light emitting mode in the early winning flash effect) and blinking with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (light emitting mode in the late winning flash effect). On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect, blue light emission with luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ are provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamps 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emitting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect. and the number of light emission modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display, and a light emission mode corresponding to the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are provided as the light emission mode of the start lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the start lamp. You may provide more than the number of modes. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the starting opening lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided to be larger than the light emitting region where the lamp 135SG009S emits light.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the start winning to the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the start lamp 135SG009S is the variable display that is the target of the holding display notice effect after the start winning (at the time of winning). Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning being executed for an excessively long time, and to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S is illuminated without blinking as the starting lamp lighting effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp 135SG009S may be blinked as the starting lamp lighting effect. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starter lamp light emitting effect, the blinking period of the starter lamp 135SG009S may be different from the blinking period (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. By making the flashing cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the winning and the flashing cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player's attention can be drawn to both the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the winning and the flashing of the starting lamp 135SG009S, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

15-28, the characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the like are turned off once when the winning flash effect is executed as shown in FIG. 15-28, but the present invention is not limited to this. The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 is lowered. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built into the image display device 5, that is, the brightness of the image display device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to a low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than the previous state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 5 In addition to lowering the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, the display of the image on the image display device 5 may be temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 may be operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself may be repeatedly operated vertically or the like, or the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be relatively lowered by increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the image on the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the image is lowered by a method other than lowering the brightness of the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined in accordance with the starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started, and then the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started. is determined, after the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R may output the sound corresponding to the win-win flash effect and complete the appearance animation of the pending display or the active display. By doing so, the player can quickly recognize that the starting prize has been generated by blinking (light emission) of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning and that the execution of the flash presentation for winning has been decided, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Appearance animation of may be started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, in the characteristic part 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize at the volume V1, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of the prize flashes at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, when the variable display for the winning flash effect is started. As in the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 may be temporarily executed. In this way, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, as in the flash effect at the time of the first term. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of the winning period is started, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning process is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the flash time at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, just as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, only one or only two of the following are output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning at the time of blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the effect image 135SG005E displayed on the image display device 5. may be executed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present specification has a different jackpot probability depending on the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), a holding display notice effect and a winning flash effect can be executed based on the start winning, and the change in the light emitting mode as the winning flash effect varies according to the lamp (characteristic part 135SG, FIGS. 15-1 to 15-68). 135SG-1, FIGS. 15-69 to 15-89), it is possible to execute a super ready-to-win performance with different expectations of a big hit, and to execute a movable body movement performance before a ready-to-win performance with a high expectation of a big hit, and when executing the movable body movement performance, change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to a light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance from the start timing of the movable body movement performance (Modification 2, FIG. 15-89). 15-90 to FIG. 15-107), a step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed while the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is not changed from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning. (Modified example 135SG-3, FIGS. 15-108 to 15-118), the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win effect, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect; (Modification 135SG-4, Fig. 15-119), display pattern α to display pattern ε are provided as the display mode of the pending display and active display, and the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display differs according to the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning by the start winning (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 15-120), and the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the pending display. 135SG-6, FIGS. 15-121 to 15-123), and the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes in accordance with the progress of the winning flash effect (Modification 135SG-7, FIGS. 15-124 to 15-130). Although shown, the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications out of these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a slot machine or a general game machine other than the pachinko gaming machine 1 as long as it performs at least a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
75SG001 pachinko machine 300 first effect unit 301 base member 302 cover member 303 LED board 331 decoration pattern 400 second effect unit 401 base member 402 cover member 403 LED board 420 decoration part 600 third effect unit 800 fourth effect unit 801 base member 802 cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member which is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a sound output means capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The translucent member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The effect executing means executes the specific light emission effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect, and sets the light emitting means in a non-light emitting state for a predetermined period from when the predetermined condition is established until the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect.
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode,
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the light emission means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images